94. The following is the Complete Grammar of Esperanto, as given by
Dr. Zamenhof at page 254 of his "Fundamenta Krestomatio de la Lingvo
Esperanto," which he says is "a book that should be in the hands of
every earnest student who desires to acquire a correct Esperanto
style." This book contains a series of Exercises, Fables, Legends,
Stories, Extracts from Scientific Articles, Articles on Esperanto,
Poetry, Translations from Hamlet and The Iliad, showing how well
Esperanto is adapted for every kind of subject.
It will be seen that the whole Grammar consists of sixteen short
Rules, which can be learnt in less than an hour. The Esperanto is
given alongside the translation. Remarks on the Rules, with examples,
will be found by referring to the paragraphs given after each Rule.
COMPLETE GRAMMAR OF ESPERANTO.
Alphabet.
The twenty-eight letters and their pronunciation are given in pars.
1–4.
N.B.—Printing offices which do not possess the
letters ĉ, ĝ, ĥ, ĵ, ŝ, ŭ, can use
instead of them ch, gh, hh, jh, sh, u.
PLENA GRAMATIKO DE ESPERANTO.
Alfabeto.
Aa, Bb, Cc, Ĉĉ, Dd, Ee,
Ff, Gg, Ĝĝ, Hh, Ĥĥ, Ii,
Jj, Ĵĵ, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn,
Oo, Pp, Rr, Ss, Ŝŝ, Tt,
Uu, Ŭŭ, Vv, Zz.
Rimarko.—Presejoj, kiuj ne posedas la literojn
ĉ, ĝ, ĥ, ĵ, ŝ, ŭ,
povas anstataŭ ili uzi ch, gh, hh, jh, sh, u.
Rules.
The Article.—There
is no indefinite article;
there is only a definite
article (la), alike for all
sexes, cases, and numbers.
N.B.—The use of the
article is the same as in
other languages. People
to whom the use of the
article presents a difficulty
need not at first
use it at all.
(See pars. 96–102.)
Reguloj.
Artikolo nedifinita ne
ekzistas; ekzistas nur
artikolo difinita (la),
egala por ĉiuj seksoj,
kazoj kaj nombroj.
Rimarko.—La uzado de la artikolo estas tia
sama, kiel en la aliaj lingvoj. La personoj, por
kiuj la uzado de la artikolo prezentas malfacilaĵon,
povas en la unua tempo tute ĝin ne uzi.
The Substantive.—Substantives have the
termination o. For the
formation of the plural
the termination j is
added. There are only
two cases: nominative
and accusative; the
latter is obtained from
the nominative by the
addition of the termination
n. The other cases
are expressed by the help
of prepositions (the genitive
by de, the dative by
al, the ablative by
per or
other prepositions according
to sense).
(See pars. 103–106.)
La substantivoj havas
la finiĝon o. Por la formado
de la multenombro
oni aldonas la finiĝon j.
Kazoj ekzistas nur du:
nominativo kaj akuzativo;
la lasta estas ricevata
el la nominativo per
la aldono de la finiĝo n.
La ceteraj kazoj estas
esprimataj per helpo de
prepozicioj (la genitivo
per de, la dativo per al,
la ablativo per per aŭ
aliaj prepozicioj laŭ la senco).
The Adjective.—The
adjective ends in a. Cases
and numbers as with the
substantive. The comparative
is made by
means of the word pli,
the superlative by plej;
with the comparative the
conjunction ol is used.
(See pars 107–114.)
La adjektivo finiĝas per
a. Kazoj kaj nombroj
kiel ĉe la substantivo. La
komparativo estas farata
per la vorto pli, la superlativo
per plej; ĉe la
komparativo oni uzas la
konjunkcion ol.
The Numerals.—The
cardinal numerals (they
are not declined) are:
unu, du, tri,
kvar, kvin,
ses, sep, ok,
naŭ, dek,
cent, mil. The tens and
hundreds are formed by
the simple junction of the
numerals. For the signification
of ordinal numerals,
the termination
of the adjective is added;
for the multiple—the suffix
-obl, for the
fractional—on,
for the collective—op,
for the distributive—the
word po. Besides
these, substantival
and adverbial numerals
can be used.
(See pars. 115–124.)
La numeraloj fundamentaj
(ne estas deklinaciataj)
estas: unu,
du, tri, kvar, kvin,
ses, sep,
ok, naŭ, dek,
cent,
mil. La dekoj kaj centoj
estas formataj per simpla
kunigo de la numeraloj.
Por la signado de numeraloj
ordaj oni aldonas
la finiĝon de la adjektivo;
por la multoblaj—la sufikson
-obl, por la nombronaj—on,
por la kolektaj—op,
por
la disdividaj—la
vorton po.
Krom tio povas esti
uzataj numeraloj substantivaj
kaj adverbaj.
The Pronouns.—Personal
pronouns = mi,
vi, li, ŝi,
ĝi (referring
to thing or animal), si, ni,
vi, ili, oni;
the possessive
pronouns are formed
by the addition of the
adjectival termination.
Declension is as with the
substantives.
(See pars. 125–138.)
Pronomoj personaj: mi,
vi, li, ŝi, ĝi (pri objekto
aŭ besto), si, ni, vi,
ili,
oni; la pronomoj posedaj
estas
formataj per la
aldono de la finiĝo adjektiva.
La deklinacio
estas kiel ĉe la substantivoj.
The Verb.—The verb
is not changed in person
or number. Forms of the
verb: the present tense
(the time being) takes
the termination -as; the
past tense (the time been,
or having been) -is; the
future tense (the time
about to be, or going to
be) -os; the Conditional
mood -us; the Imperative
(ordering) mood -u;
the Indefinite (infinitive)
mood -i. Participles
(with an adjectival or
adverbial sense): active
present -ant; active past
-int; active future -ont;
passive present -at; passive
past -it; passive future
-ot. All forms of the
passive are formed by
help of a corresponding
form of the verb esti and
a passive participle of the
required verb. The preposition
with the passive
is de.
(See pars. 159–237.)
La verbo ne estas ŝanĝata
laŭ personoj nek
nombroj. Formoj de la
verbo: la tempo estanta
akceptas la finiĝon -as;
la tempo estinta -is; la
tempo estonta -os; la
modo kondiĉa -us; la
modo ordona -u; la
modo sendifina -i. Participoj
(kun senco adjektiva
aŭ adverba):
aktiva estanta -ant; aktiva
estinta -int; aktiva
estonta -ont; pasiva estanta
-at; pasiva estinta
-it; pasiva estonta -ot.
Ĉiuj formoj de la pasivo
estas formataj per helpo
de responda formo de la
verbo esti kaj participo
pasiva de la bezonata
verbo; la prepozicio ĉe
la pasivo estas de.
The Adverb.—Adverbs
end in e; degrees
of comparison as with
adjectives.
(See pars. 238–248.)
La adverboj finiĝas per
e; gradoj de komparado
kiel ĉe la adjektivoj.
The Preposition.—All
prepositions require
the nominative.
(See pars. 249–261.)
Ĉiuj prepozicioj postulas
la nominativon.
Pronunciation.—Every
word is read as
it is written.
(See pars. 5–19.)
Ĉiu vorto estas legata,
kiel ĝi estas skribita.
Accent.—The accent
is always on the penultimate
syllable.
(See par. 17.)
La akcento estas ĉiam sur la antaŭlasta silabo.
Compound Words.—Compound words are formed by the simple junction
of words (the chief word stands at the end); the grammatical
terminations are also regarded as independent words.
(See pars. 39–50.)
Vortoj kunmetitaj estas
formataj per simpla
kunigo de la vortoj (la
ĉefa vorto staras en la
fino); la gramatikaj
finiĝoj estas rigardataj
ankaŭ kiel memstaraj
vortoj.
Negation.—When
another negative word is present the word ne is omitted.
(See pars. 59–62.)
Ĉe alia nea vorto la vorto ne estas forlasata.
Direction.—In order to show direction, words
take the termination of the accusative.
(See par. 67.)
Por montri direkton, la vortoj ricevas la finiĝon de la akuzativo.
Use of Prepositions.—Every
preposition has
a definite and constant
meaning; but if we have
to use some preposition
and the direct sense does
not indicate to us what
special preposition we are
to take, then we use the
preposition je, which has
no meaning of its own.
Instead of the preposition
je we can also use
the accusative without a
preposition.
(See par. 251.)
Ĉiu prepozicio havas
difinitan kaj konstantan
signifon; sed se ni devas
uzi ian prepozicion kaj la
rekta senco ne montras al
ni, kian nome prepozicion
ni devas preni, tiam
ni uzas la prepozicion je,
kiu memstaran signifon
ne havas. Anstataŭ la
prepozicio je oni povas
ankaŭ uzi la akuzativon
sen prepozicio.
Foreign Words.—The
so-called foreign
words, that is, those
which the majority of
languages have taken
from one source, are used
in the Esperanto language
without change,
receiving only the orthography
of the latter language;
but with various
words from one root it is
better to use unchanged
only the fundamental
word, and to form the
rest from this latter in
accordance with the rules
of the Esperanto language.
(See pars. 39, 52.)
La tiel nomataj vortoj
fremdaj, t.e., tiuj, kiujn
la plimulto de la lingvoj
prenis el unu fonto, estas
uzataj en la lingvo Esperanto
sen ŝanĝo, ricevante
nur la ortografion de tiu
ĉi lingvo; sed ĉe diversaj
vortoj de unu radiko
estas pli bone uzi senŝanĝe
nur la vorton fundamentan
kaj la ceterajn
formi el tiu ĉi lasta
laŭ la reguloj de la lingvo
Esperanto.
Elision.—The final
vowel of the substantive
and the article can be
dropped and replaced by
an apostrophe.
(See pars. 56, 57.)
La fina vokalo de la
substantivo kaj de la
artikolo povas esti forlasata
kaj anstataŭigata
de apostrofo.
COMMENTARY
ON THE
GRAMMAR.
95. There are nine parts of speech in Esperanto, as found in most
other languages, viz., the Article (Artikolo), Noun (Substantivo),
Pronoun (Pronomo), Adjective (Adjektivo), Verb (Verbo), Adverb
(Adverbo), Preposition (Prepozicio), Conjunction (Konjunkcio),
Interjection (Interjekcio).
Nouns, derived adjectives and adverbs, and verbs have distinctive
terminations. If a word ends in -O, it is a noun; if in -A, an
adjective; if in -E, an adverb; if in -I, -U, -AS, -IS,
-OS, or -US, a verb. If it ends in -N, it is in the accusative
case, and if in -J, it is plural.
Examples.—Domo = a house. Facila = easy. Feliĉe = happily.
Doni = to give (Infinitive). Batu lin = beat him (Imperative and
Accusative). Mi vidas la homojn = I see the men (Present tense and
Accusative plural). Vi diris = you said (Past tense). Ni iros =
we shall go (Future tense). Se ili estus bonaj = If they were good
(Conditional mood and plural adjective).
96. There is no word in Esperanto for the Indefinite Article. It
is, as in Latin, implied in the noun, if the sense in English
requires it.
Examples.—Tio estas floro = That is a flower. Patrino kaj filo =
Mother and son. Ĉu vi vidas birdon sur tiu arbo? = Do you see a
bird on that tree?
97. The definite article is la = the. It is, as in English, the
same for all genders, numbers, and cases.
Examples.—La patro = The father. La patrino = The mother. Donu
al mi la libron = Give me the book. Ili estas la lernantoj
diligentaj = They are the diligent scholars.
98. As regards its use, la is used very nearly as the definite
article "the" in English, namely, to show that one is speaking of
something known or definite, as opposed to what is indefinite.
Examples.—En la mezo de la korto mi vidis du infanojn el la apuda
vilaĝo = In the middle of the yard I saw two children of the
neighbouring village. In this sentence the yard and village are each
defined by the article la, as they are also in English by "the."
But if we omit the article the sentence runs:—En la mezo de korto
mi vidis du infanojn el apuda vilaĝo = In the middle of a yard I
saw two children of a neighbouring village. In this case the children
might have been in any yard, and have belonged to any village in
the neighbourhood of the speaker.
99. There are, however, cases in which the article is often used in
Esperanto, though omitted in English, and also vice versa.
(a). It is usually used before nouns denoting the totality of
persons or things.
Examples.—La homo estas mortema = Man is mortal. La homoj estas
mortemaj = Men are mortal. La medicino estas scienco kaj la
pentrado arto = Medicine is a science and painting an art. Kelkaj
kuracistoj pretendas, ke la vino estas malutila al la sano = Some
doctors maintain that wine is hurtful to health. Sen la akvo nia
terglobo rapide fariĝus dezerto = Without water our earth would
rapidly become a desert. La nokto estis tiel nigra, kiel la peĉo =
The night was as dark as pitch. La azenoj amas la kardojn = Donkeys
love thistles. La vento kaŭzas ofte teruran detruon en kelkaj
landoj = Wind often causes terrible ruin in some countries. (In this
case la vento means wind in general, spoken of as a whole, but
"To-day we shall have wind" (meaning some wind) would be: Hodiaŭ ni
havos venton.) Hajlo falas = Hail is falling (viz., some hail),
but La hajlo estas tre malutila al la vinbero = Hail is very
injurious to grapes (to the grape), means hail in general.
(b). It is not used before proper names, for the simple reason
that they cannot be more definite than they are in themselves. In
English it is sometimes used and sometimes not.[13]
Examples.—Danubo = The Danube. Tibro = The Tiber. Mediteraneo
= The Mediterranean. Alpoj = The Alps. Unuiĝintaj Ŝtatoj
Amerikaj (or, Usono) = The United States of America.
(c). If, however, a proper name is preceded by a qualifying word,
the article is used.
Examples. La glora poeto, Dante = The famous poet, Dante. La
imperiestro de Japanujo = The Emperor of Japan. La bona reĝino
Viktorio = The good Queen Victoria.
100. The article may be used sometimes where, in English, we use a
possessive pronoun.
Examples.—Li havas doloron en la kapo = He has a pain in his (the)
head. Ŝi prezentis al mi la manon = She offered me her hand. Mi
malkovris la okulojn = I uncovered my eyes (see also par. 134(a)).
(a). It is also frequently used instead of a possessive pronoun in
speaking of one’s own relatives,
or when there is no doubt as to the
person to whom the article la refers.
Examples.—Mi amas la patron = I love my (the) father. Iru al la
patrino = Go to your (the) mother. Kie estas la kuzo? = Where is
your (the) cousin? La patro staras apud la filo = The father stands
by (at the side of) his (the) son.
101. The article is almost always used before numeral adjectives
showing the day, hour, month, etc., when these nouns are understood.
Example.—Hodiaŭ estas la dudek-sepa (tago) de Marto = To-day is
the 27th of March.
(a). Its use is optional before the names of the seasons, and also
before each separate noun or adjective.
Examples.—En la vintro, or, En vintro = In the winter. En la
somero, or, En somero = In the summer. La arboj, la floroj kaj la
kreskaĵoj de la ĝardeno (or, La arboj, floroj kaj kreskaĵoj) =
The trees, (the) flowers and (the) plants of the garden.
(b). It is not generally used after ĉiuj = all, or, all the.
Example.—Mi ne vidis ĉiujn arbojn en la ĝardeno = I did not see
all the trees in the garden.
(c). It is not used after da (see par. 259).
N.B.—From the foregoing remarks it will be seen that the English
student will have no difficulty in the use of the article, if he be
careful to use it with words defining a class or the totality of
persons or things. He will get a good idea of its use if he will
carefully study the first few exercises in the "Ekzercaro," or
Exercises 1 to 4 in Part III.
In case of doubt whether the article should be used or not, it is
better to omit it.
102. Elision.—The final A of the article may be omitted in
certain cases (see par. 56 and Rule 16, par. 94).
103. A noun (in the singular number) in all its cases, except the
accusative, ends in -O. The accusative is formed by the addition of
N. In the plural it ends in -OJ, and the accusative plural is
formed by adding N to these letters. Thus the root arb- is made
into a noun with its numbers and cases as follows:—
- Arb-o = a tree (nominative, singular).
- Arb-on = a tree (accusative, singular).
- Arb-oj = trees (nominative, plural).
- Arb-ojn = trees (accusative, plural).
Examples.—Domo = A house. La domo = The house. La domoj = The
houses. Rigardu la domojn = Look at the houses. Knabo = A boy.
La knabo = The boy. Mi vidis la knabon = I saw the boy. Knabino
= A girl. La knabino = The girl.
104. There are but two cases in Esperanto (Rule 2, par. 94), viz.,
the nominative and the accusative (or objective); the latter is
obtained from the nominative by adding N to the singular or plural.
Other cases are expressed by the aid of prepositions, as:—
| Nominative | Mia bona patro | = My good father. |
| Accusative | Mian bonan patron | = My good father. |
| Genitive or Possessive | De mia bona patro | = Of my good father, or, My good father’s. |
| Dative | Al mia bona patro | = To my good father. |
| Ablative | De mia bona patro | = From (by, see par. 259 (9)) my good father. |
| Kun mia bona patro | = With my good father. |
| Per bona glavo | = With (by means of) a good sword. |
Note that per = by is the instrumental ablative, meaning "by
means, or aid, or use, of," and that kun = with means "in company
with," but not in an instrumental sense, as it is sometimes in
English, e.g., I held him with both hands = Mi lin tenis per
ambaŭ manoj, not kun ambaŭ manoj (see par. 259 (22)).
(a). In the plural the declension is the same, with the addition of
the plural termination J, as:—
| Genitive | De miaj bonaj filoj | = Of my good sons. |
| Accusative | Miajn bonajn filojn | = My good sons. |
Examples.—La frato skribas, kaj la fratino legas = The brother is
writing and the sister reading. La patro donis la libron al sia
filo = The father gave the book to his son. Tiu ĉi kaŭĉuka
ringo (or, ringo el kaŭĉuko) estas por la infaneto = This
india-rubber ring is for the baby. Mi vidis Jozefon kun lia kuzo =
I saw Joseph with his cousin. Venu, ni atendas Vin (Cin), Savinto de
la mondo = Come, we await You (Thee), O Saviour of the world. Mi
lin salutis per la mano = I saluted him by the hand. La domo estas
kovrita per ardezoj = The house is covered with slates. Mi vidis
vian patron kun liaj du filoj = I saw your father with his two sons.
Kie estas la domo de via patro? = Where is your father’s house?
105. Ellipsis.—The case (nominative or accusative) of words in
Esperanto often depends upon the verb omitted when ellipsis occurs in
a phrase, and
unless we write the sentence in full, or think what
the ellipsis is, we may not at first know what case to use to express
our meaning. A glance at the following examples will show how easy it
is to determine the case. The words in brackets show the ellipsis:—
- Mi konas lin pli bone, ol vi (konas lin) = I know him better than
you (do, or know him).
- Mi konas lin pli bone, ol vin (ol mi konas vin) = I know him
better than you (than I know you).
- Petro amas Paŭlon tiom, kiom (li amas) Johanon = Peter loves
Paul as much as (he loves) John.
- Petro amas Paŭlon tiom, kiom Johano (amas lin) = Peter loves
Paul as much as John (loves him).
N.B.—In the above sentences we cannot, in English, tell the meaning
until the ellipsis is supplied, whereas, in Esperanto, the meaning is
at once clear from the case of the noun or pronoun (par. 112).
- Li iris tien, kiel ankaŭ vi (iris) = He went there as well as
you (went).
- Mi vidis lin tie, kiel ankaŭ (mi vidis) vin = I saw him there
as well as (I saw) you.
- Mi neniam vidis tian hundon, kia (estas) via = I never saw such
a dog as yours.
105 (a). Elision.—The final O of a noun may be omitted (par.
57, and Rule 16, par. 94).
106. Possession is (a) expressed by help of the preposition de.
Examples.—La domo de la patro = The father’s house, or, the
house of the father. La libro de mia patrino = My mother’s book,
or, the book of my mother. La tranĉilo de Georgo = George’s
knife. Tio estas la domo de miaj fratoj = That is my brothers’
house (the house of my brothers). (See par. 73.)
(b). Possession is also denoted by the correlative words ending in
ES, viz.:—ies = someone’s, somebody’s, ĉies =
everyone’s, kies = whose, nenies = nobody’s, ties = that
one’s, of those (see par. 154).
Examples.—Ĉies ideo estis diversa = Everyone’s idea was
different. Kies domo estas tiu? = Whose house is that? Ĝi estas
nenies domo = It is nobody’s house. Ĉu ĉi tio estas ies
tranĉilo? = Is this anyone’s (someone’s) knife? (see par. 154).
(c). An adjective is sometimes conveniently used when in English we
employ an apostrophe.
Examples.—Unutaga laboro (for, la laboro de unu tago) = One
day’s work. La unuataga laboro (for, la laboro de la unua tago) =
The first day’s work. Lia unuataga laboro estis en la ĝardeno, kaj
poste li faris unutagan laboron en la domo = His first day’s work
was in the garden, and then (afterwards) he did one day’s work in the
house. Mi atendis la kapitanan respondon = I awaited the captain’s
reply.
(d). In speaking of places, the English preposition "of" is not
translated.
Examples.—La urbo Londono = The City of London. La Kolonio
Natalo = The Colony of Natal (see par. 253 (a)).
For numeral nouns, see par. 118; for participial, pars. 208, 209; for
predicative, par. 109; for compound nouns, par. 49; for form of
accusative with proper names, par. 69 (d); for the infinitive used
as a noun, par. 180.
107. The Adjective always ends in -A in the singular. J is
added to A to form the plural. The accusative case is formed by the
addition of N to the singular or plural termination.
Examples.—Forta = Strong. Saĝa = Wise. Brava = Brave. Forta
homo = A strong man. Saĝa patro = A wise father. Saĝaj patroj
= Wise fathers. La brava filo = The brave son. La bravaj filoj =
The brave sons.
108. There are two kinds of adjectives, viz.:—(a) Qualifying or
attributive (apudmetita = put adjacent), and (b) Predicative
(predikateca).
(a). A qualifying adjective is one placed before or after its
noun, with which it agrees both in number and case (par. 36).
Examples.—Johano havas bonan panon = John has good bread.
Vilhelmo akrigis la tranĉilojn malakrajn = William sharpened the
blunt knives.
(b). A predicative adjective, usually placed after the verb,
denotes what is said about the noun or pronoun to which it refers, or
denotes their state, condition, appearance, etc. It agrees with them
in number, but is never in the accusative case (par. 36).
Examples.—La pomo estas bona = The apple is good. Vilhelmo trovis
la tranĉilojn malakraj = William found the knives blunt. If the
adjective were in this sentence in the accusative, the meaning would
be quite altered, for, Vilhelmo trovis la tranĉilojn malakrajn
would mean, "William found the blunt knives," that is to say, he was
looking for blunt knives, and he found them. A predicative adjective
shows that ellipsis has taken place, and the omitted verb is
generally esti. For instance, the ellipsis in the above sentence
might be as follows:—William found (that) the
knives (are) blunt—Vilhelmo trovis, ke la tranĉiloj estas
malakraj. If we elide ke and estas, the substantive takes the
accusative (tranĉilojn) and the adjective (malakraj) remains in
the nominative. Other examples are:—La kutimo faris lin (ke li
estu) indiferenta por tio ĉi (Hamleto V., 1) = Habit made him (to
be, lit., that he be) indifferent to this. Kion vi intencas nun
fari, por vin montri (ke vi estas) inda filo de via kara patro?
(Hamleto IV.,7) = What do you now intend to do to show yourself (that
you are) a worthy son of your dear father? (see par. 105 on
ellipsis).
109. Predicative Noun.—A noun also can be predicative (see par. 35).
Examples.—La patro nomis sian filon Johano = The father named his
son John. Now in English it is not clear whether the father gave the
name of "John" to his son, or whether he made mention of his son
whose name was John. In Esperanto it is quite clear that he gave the
name, for otherwise "John" would be in the accusative (Johanon,
so:—La patro nomis sian filon Johanon = The father named (made
mention of) his son John. Ili nomis lin Adolfo = They called him
(gave him the name of) Adolphus.
110. Nominative or Accusative.—The rule, therefore, for qualifying
and predicative adjectives or nouns is:—
(a). The word will be in the accusative if the object already
possesses the quality in question.
(b). The word will be in the nominative if that quality, which it
did not before possess, or was not known to possess, is being given
to the object.
111. Participial Adjectives.—Participles are often used in
Esperanto to qualify nouns and pronouns, and they are then in reality
true adjectives. To distinguish them from other adjectives they are
called "Participial Adjectives" (Participaj adjektivoj).
Examples.—Johano kaj Georgo estis perditaj = John and George were
lost. Ni trovis ilin mortantajn = We found them (who were) dying.
Ni estis finintaj, kiam vi alvenis = We had finished when you
arrived (see par. 209 (b)).
112. Comparison of Adjectives.
(a). The comparative of equality is tiel ... kiel = as,
so ... as.
Johano estas tiel forta, kiel Georgo = John is as strong as
George.
(b). The comparative of superiority is pli ... ol = more
... than.
Johano estas pli forta, ol Georgo = John is stronger than George.
(c). The comparative of inferiority is malpli ... ol = less
... than.
Johano estas malpli forta, ol Georgo = John is less strong
(weaker) than George.
(d). The other modes of expressing comparison are:—
- tia ... kia = such, such a, such kind ... as.
- sama ... kia = the same ... as.
- same ... kiel = the same ... as.
- Ju pli ... des pli = the more ... the more.
- Ju malpli ... des malpli = the less ... the less.
- Ju pli ... des malpli = the more ... the less.
- Ju malpli ... des pli = the less ... the more.
Examples.—Tia domo, kia tiu, estas malofte vidata = Such a house
as that is rarely seen. Mia bastono estas tia sama, kia via, or,
Mia bastono estas same, kiel via = My stick is the same as yours.
Ju pli mi lin konas, des pli mi lin estimas = The more I know him,
the more I esteem him. Ju malpli mi dormas, des malpli mi sentas la
bezonon dormi = The less I sleep, the less I feel the want (need) to
sleep. Ju pli mi lin vidas, des malpli li plaĉas al mi = The more
I see him, the less he pleases me. Ju malpli mi manĝas, des pli mi
trinkas = The less I eat, the more I drink.
Be careful to note that the second term in a comparison is in the
nominative or accusative, according as it is the subject or
complement, e.g., Mi amas
mian fraton pli, ol mia fratino = I
love my brother more than my sister (loves him). Mia fratino is in
the nominative, amas lin being understood. But Mi amas mian fraton
pli, ol mian fratinon = I love my brother more than my sister.
Here fratinon is in the accusative, and the meaning is perfectly
clear. In English we should have to add "does" to the first example
to make the phrase clear: "I love my brother more than my sister
does" (see par. 105).
113. Superlatives (Superlativoj).
(a). The superlative of superiority is la plej = the most.
(b). The superlative of inferiority is la malplej = the
least.
The preposition el = out of, of, is used with the superlative
when it relates to numbers, or something collective, as a "group,"
"society," etc. But when the superlative relates to the place or
position where the superiority is or was, then some other appropriate
preposition is used.
Examples.—Johano estas la plej forta el la knaboj = John is the
strongest of the boys. Petro estis la plej malforta el ĉiuj =
Peter was the weakest of (out of) all. Georgo estas la malplej
kuraĝa knabo en la domo = George is the least courageous boy in the
house. Ŝi estis la plej bela virino, kiun mi iam vidis = She was
the most beautiful woman whom I ever saw. Tiuj ĉi estas la plej
grandaj arboj en la arbaro = These are the largest trees in the
wood. Li estis la plej bona Esperantisto el la grupo (klubo,
societo) = He was the best Esperantist of the group (club,
society). Metu la plej grandajn glasojn sur la tablon = Put the
largest glasses upon the table. Ne ĵetu la plej grandajn ŝtonojn
en la puton, sed la plej malgrandajn (malplej grandajn) = Do not
throw the largest stones into the well, but the smallest (the least
large).
(c). The superlative absolute is indicated by tre
= very, or
treege = exceedingly, or troe = excessively, or some other
suitable adverb.
Example.—Tiu virino estas tre malbela kaj treege grasa = That
woman is very ugly and exceedingly fat.
114. Degrees of intensity of adjectives can also be shown by the
aid of the suffixes -EG- and -ET- with or without an adverb. The
suffix -EG- is stronger in its application than the adverb tre =
very. For instance, take the adjective bela = beautiful, or
fine. Tre bela = very beautiful, or very fine; but belega =
magnificent, or superb. So, the diminutive -ET- shows more
diminution than the adjective malgranda = small, or little,
would show when qualifying a noun. For instance, malgranda rivero =
a small river, but rivereto = a brook, or stream. The
following list shows how twelve adjectives of varying shades of
intensity can be formed from the root varm-, between the extremes
tre varmega = broiling hot and tre malvarmega = intensely
cold, supposing we were speaking of the weather:—
| Tre varmega = Broiling hot. | Tre malvarmega = Intensely cold. |
| Varmega = Hot. | Malvarmega = Bitterly cold. |
| Tre varma = Very warm. | Tre malvarma = Very cold. |
| Varma = Warm. | Malvarma = Cold. |
| Iom varma = Warmish. | Iom malvarma = Coldish. |
| Varmeta = Mild. | Malvarmeta = Cool. |
See remarks on the suffixes -EG- and -ET-, par. 277.
115. The cardinal numbers are:—
(1) unu, (2) du, (3) tri, (4) kvar, (5) kvin, (6) ses,
(7) sep, (8) ok, (9) naŭ, (10) dek, (100) cent, (1,000)
mil, (0) (zero, naught) = nulo.
Miliono (million) is a noun, the root being milion-.
(a). The numbers 11 to 19 are formed by simply placing (10) dek
before the first nine, as:—(11) dek unu, (12) dek du, (13) dek
tri, (14) dek kvar, (15) dek kvin, (16) dek ses, (17) dek
sep, (18) dek ok, (19) dek naŭ.
(b). The numbers (101 to 119), or (1,001 to 1,019), are formed by
the addition cent, or mil, as:—(101) cent unu, (102) cent
du, (110) cent dek, (116) cent dek ses, (1,001) mil unu,
(1,006) mil ses, (1,114) mil cent dek kvar.
(c). The tens, hundreds, and thousands are formed by prefixing one
of the numbers 2 to 9 before dek, cent, or mil, as:—(20)
dudek, (30) tridek, (40) kvardek, (200) ducent, (500)
kvincent, (900) naŭcent, (2,000) dumil, (4,000) kvarmil,
(8,000) okmil.
(d). The intermediate numbers (21 to 29), (31 to 39), etc., are
formed by adding the required number to the tens, as:—(21) dudek
unu, (22) dudek du, (33) tridek tri, (96) naŭdek ses, (121)
cent dudek unu, (342) tricent kvardek du, (1,021) mil dudek
unu, (8,754) okmil sepcent kvindek kvar.
(e). The cardinal numbers never change their forms for case or
number.
Examples.—La du infanoj dividis inter si sep pomojn = The two
children divided between themselves seven apples. Unu prenis tri kaj
la alia prenis kvar el la pomoj = One took three and the other took
four of the apples. Kvin kaj sep faras (or, estas) dek du = 5
and 7 make (are) 12.
(f). Unu is sometimes used in the plural, and unuj then means
some. It is used generally in relation with aliaj = others.
Examples.—El ŝiaj multaj infanoj, unuj estas bonaj kaj aliaj
malbonaj = Among (out of) her many children, some are good and
others bad. Li ekzamenis la pomojn, kaj trovis unujn bonaj kaj
aliajn malbonaj = He examined the apples, and found some good and
others bad. Note that bonaj and malbonaj are predicative
adjectives, and therefore in the nominative (see pars. 36, 108
(b)).
(g). Unu is sometimes used when our indefinite article is
employed as a numeral.[14]
Example.—Ĉar ĉiu el ni havas unu vortaron, prenu vian kaj lasu
mian = Since we have each a dictionary, take yours and leave mine.
116. Ordinal numbers, being really adjectives, are, in Esperanto,
made such in the usual way by adding A to the cardinals,
as:—unua = first, dua = second, tria = third, kvara =
fourth, kvina = fifth, sesa = sixth, sepa = seventh,
oka = eighth, naŭa = ninth, deka = tenth.
(a). If the cardinal is composed of two or more numbers, A is
added to the last only, as:—dek-unua = eleventh, dek-dua =
twelfth, dek-naŭa = nineteenth, dudeka = twentieth,
dudek-unua = twenty-first, cent-tridek-naŭa = hundred and
thirty-ninth.
N.B.—Note that the ordinal numbers are linked by hyphens.
(b). The Ordinals follow all the rules of adjectives as to case and
number.
Examples.—Donu al li la trian, kaj prenu la kvaran = Give him the
third, and take the fourth. La kvinaj etaĝoj de tiuj domoj estas
tre altaj = The fifth stories of those houses are very high.
(c). The Ordinals are usually used in speaking of pages, hours,
days, months, years, kings, etc.
Examples.—Paĝo trideka = Page thirty. Vidu paĝon kvardekan
(or, 40an) = See page forty (40). Henriko kvara = Henry IV. La
dek-unua horo = 11 o’clock. En la dek-sesa (tago) de Aprilo =
On the 16th of April. En la jaro mil-okcent-naŭdek-naŭa = In
1899. Mil-naŭcent-kvara = 1904.
In asking questions about the above, the adjective kioma is often
used.
Examples.—Sur kioma paĝo vi vidis tion? = On what page did you
see that? Kioma paĝo estas? = What page is it? Kioma horo estas?
= What o’clock is it? Estas la dua = It is two o’clock. Kiun daton
ni havas? = What is the date (or, day of the month)? Hodiaŭ estas
la dudek-sepa (or, 27a) de Marto = To-day is the 27th of March.
117. Ordinal adverbs are formed by adding E to the cardinals,
as:—unue, firstly, due, secondly, sepe, seventhly, etc.
118. Substantives are formed from the cardinals by adding O. They
have various meanings, as:—Unuo = a unit, or a one. Duo = a
duet, or a two (of cards). Trio = a trio, or triplet, or a
three (of cards). Kvaro, etc. = a four, etc. (of cards, etc., up
to ten). Dek-duo = a dozen. Deko = half a score. Dudeko =
a score. Cento = a hundred. Milo = a thousand. Miliono =
a million.
Examples.—Li havas dudekojn da ĉevaloj, centojn da ŝafoj, kaj
milojn da birdoj = He has scores of horses, hundreds of sheep, and
thousands of birds. Tiuj ludkartoj estas la kvaro pika kaj la seso
kera = Those cards are the four of spades and the six of hearts.
Tiu cifero estas oko = That figure is an eight.
119. Multiples are formed by the addition of the suffix -OBL- to
the cardinals, and then adding A, E, or O to mark the
adjective, adverb, or noun. They can also be formed into transitive
verbs by the suffix -IGI-, or intransitive by the suffix -IĜI-.
Examples.—Unuobla = Single. Unuoble = Singly. Duobla = Double,
twofold. Duoble = Doubly. La duoblo = The double. Duobligi = To
double, to duplicate. Duobliĝi = To become double. Triobla =
Triple, threefold. Trioble = Trebly. La trioblo = The treble
(of). Triobligi = To treble, to triplicate. Kvarobla = Fourfold,
quadruple. Kvaroble = Quadruply. Kvaroblo = A quadruple.
Kvarobligi = To quadruple, to make fourfold. Kvarobliĝi = To
become quadruple. Sepobla = Sevenfold, septuple. Centoblo = A
centuple. Kvinoble sep estas tridek kvin = Five times (fivefold) 7
is 35. Naŭoble ok estas sepdek du = Nine times (ninefold) 8 is 72.
Kvaroble kvar estas dek ses = Four times four is 16. Dudek estas
la kvaroblo de kvin = Twenty is the quadruple of five. Duobla
fadeno estas pli forta ol unuobla = A double thread is stronger than
a single (one). Kvarobligante sepdek kvin vi ricevas la centoblon de
tri = By quadrupling 75 you get the centuple of 3.
120. Fractional numbers are formed by the addition of the suffix
-ON- to the cardinals, and then adding A, E, or O to mark the
adjective, adverb, or noun, as:—Duona = half, duone = by
halves, duono = a half (1⁄2), triona = third, trione = by
thirds, triono = a third (1⁄3).
Examples.—La kvarona parto de dudek kvar estas la duono de dek du,
tio estas ses = The fourth part of 24 is the half of 12, that is 6.
Unu triono = One third (1⁄3). Tri okonoj = Three eighths (3⁄8).
Neniam faru ion poduone = Never do anything by halves. Duone ses
estas tri = half of six is three.
121. The collectives are formed by the addition of the suffix
-OP- to the cardinals, and then adding A or E to mark
adjectives or adverbs, as:—Duopa = double, two together,
duope = by twos, in pairs, triope = in threes, in
triplets, dekope = by tens.
Example.—Kvinope ili sin ĵetis sur min = Five together (five at a
time) they threw themselves upon me.
122. Reiteratives are formed by adding the adverb foje to the
cardinals, as:—Unufoje = once, dufoje = twice, trifoje =
thrice, kvarfoje = four times.
Examples.—Hieraŭ mi renkontis lin unufoje (or, unu fojon), sed
hodiaŭ dufoje (or, du fojojn) = Yesterday I met him once, but
to-day twice.
N.B.—Note that when the substantive fojo is used, it is in the
accusative, as denoting point of time (par. 68 (b)).
123. Distributives are marked by the preposition po placed before
the cardinals, meaning at the rate of, in the proportion of.
Examples.—Al ĉiu el la laborantoj mi pagis po kvin ŝilingoj = I
paid each of the workmen at the rate of five shillings. Tiu ĉi
libro enhavas sesdek paĝojn; tial, se mi legos en ĉiu tago po dek
kvin paĝoj, mi finos la tutan libron en kvar tagoj = This book
contains 60 pages, therefore if I (shall) read (in) each day at the
rate of 15 pages, I shall finish the whole book in 4 days (see "po"
in list of prepositions, par. 259 (22)).
124. There are several possible ways of expressing the time of day.
"A quarter to three" (2.45) may be either:—
(a). Tri kvaronoj de la tria = three-quarters of the 3rd
(hour).
(b). La dua kaj tri kvaronoj = the 2nd (hour) and
three-quarters.
(c). Kvarono antaŭ la tria = a quarter before the 3rd
(hour).
The last example is the only one which would be easily understood by
an Englishman. Other nations use one or two of these methods, hence
we find a diversity of methods used in Esperanto also. There is,
however, one way used by nearly all nations, namely, that in railway
time tables, and it is to be hoped that this will come into general
use. Therefore to the question:—Kioma horo estas? = What time
(hour) is it? we might simply say as follows:—
| 2.0 | =La dua (horo). |
| 2.15 | =La dua (horo) kaj dek kvin (minutoj). |
| 3.5 | =La tria (horo) kvin. |
| 10.2 | =La deka (horo) du. |
| 11.45 | =La dek-unua (horo) kvardek kvin. |
In Italy, Belgium, etc., where the hours are numbered from one to
twenty-four, this system is equally applicable, as:—4.10 p.m. in
Italy = 16.10 = La dek-sesa (horo) dek.
125. There are seven classes of Pronouns:—(1) Personal, (2)
Possessive, (3) Relative, (4) Interrogative, (5) Demonstrative, (6)
Distributive or Collective, (7) Indefinite.
As, however, the last five classes are so intimately connected with
other parts of speech, and as some of the pronouns represent two
classes, and some two parts of speech, it is better to treat them as
correlative words (see pars. 139–157), so under the head of
"Pronouns" we give only the personal and possessive.
126. The personal pronouns are:—
Nominative.
| Singular. | 1st Person. | Mi = I. |
| " | 2nd Person. | Vi = you, thou. (Ci = thou is rarely used). |
| " | 3rd Person. | Li = he, Ŝi = she, Ĝi = it. |
| Plural. | 1st Person. | Ni = we. |
| " | 2nd Person. | Vi = you, ye. |
| " | 3rd Person. | Ili = they. |
Accusative.
| Singular. | 1st Person. | Min = me. |
| " | 2nd Person. | Vin = you, thee. (Cin = thee is rarely used). |
| " | 3rd Person. | Lin = him, Ŝin = her, Ĝin = it. |
| Plural. | 1st Person. | Nin = us. |
| " | 2nd Person. | Vin = you. |
| " | 3rd Person. | Ilin = them. |
Oni = one, people, they, we (like the French "on"), is an
indefinite pronoun of the 3rd person. Oni may be deemed singular or
plural.
Owing to the fact that in most languages the word corresponding to
oni is invariable, Esperanto authors have generally avoided the
accusative and possessive forms onin and onia, although they are
occasionally met with. These forms are, however, perfectly regular,
and may be used without hesitation if desired.
Si = self, selves, oneself, is a reflexive pronoun of the 3rd
person, singular or plural.
Vi, like "you" in English, represents both the singular and plural,
but when it refers to more than one person, words depending on it
take the plural form.
Ĝi, like "it" in English, is used to represent things, and also
persons and animals when the name does not reveal the sex.
Examples.—Mi lin amas = I love him. Li min vidas = He sees me.
Ili trovis lin kaj min en la ĝardeno = They found him and me in
the garden. Vi ne vidis nin = You did not see us. Vi (plural)
estas pli saĝaj, ol ili (estas) = You are wiser than they are.
Ŝi vidis ilin en la dormoĉambro = She saw them in the bedroom.
Oni diras, "Per mono oni povas aĉeti ĉion" = They (people) say
(it is said), "With money one (or, we) can buy everything. Mi
vidis la domon, sed ĝi estis tro malgranda = I saw the house, but
it was too small. Se oni estus riĉa, or riĉaj = If one were
rich.
(a).—In words like infano = child, persono = person,
individuo = individual, etc., the sex is not revealed; neither is
it in the general name of an animal, as:—leono = a lion, hundo
= a dog, birdo = a bird, etc., unless we add the feminine
suffix -ino. In all such cases, when we do not know the sex, we use
the pronoun ĝi. If, however, the sex is known, and we wish to
demonstrate it, we can use the pronouns li or ŝi respectively.
Zamenhof advises the use of li and ŝi for human beings only, and
of ĝi for all other animals, even when the sex of the animal is
known and indicated; the use of li or ŝi in such cases is
nevertheless legitimate if desired.
Examples.—La infano forkuris, kiam mi parolis al ĝi (or li if
we know the sex) = The child ran away when I spoke to it. Tio estas
bela ĉevalino, ĝi (or, ŝi) trotas bone = That is a fine mare,
she trots well. Se iu vizitos min dum mi forestas, diru al ĝi, ke
ĝi revenu morgaŭ = If anyone (someone) should call upon (visit) me
whilst I am away, tell him or her (it) to come again to-morrow.[15]
127. The word mem = self or selves is sometimes used with a
personal pronoun or noun to give emphasis.
Examples.—Mi mem ĝin vidis = I myself saw it. Ni mem ĝin
trovis, or, Ni ĝin trovis mem = We found it ourselves. Vi venu
mem = Come yourself. Ŝi mem parolos = She herself will speak. Li
mem respondu = Let him answer (for) himself. La virinoj venu mem =
Let the women come themselves.
128. Si is a reflexive pronoun of the 3rd person, and therefore
cannot refer to the pronouns of the 1st and 2nd persons.[16] We
cannot say Mi lavas sin, or Ni, or Vi lavas sin, for "I wash
myself," "We wash ourselves," "You wash yourself." We must, in each
of these cases, use the pronoun which is the subject of the verb,
as:—Mi lavas min—Ni lavas nin—Vi lavas vin = I wash
myself—We wash ourselves—You wash yourself (or if vi = you
is plural), You wash yourselves. Si, therefore, is used for the
3rd person, singular or plural, when it refers to the subject of
the verb. It takes the accusative termination N when necessary, and
then represents "himself, herself, itself, oneself,
themselves."
Examples.—Li razis sin = He shaved himself. Petro razis sin =
Peter shaved himself (Petro razis lin would mean Peter shaved
him, viz., some other man referred to in the sentence). Ŝi diris
al si = She said to herself (Ŝi diris al ŝi would mean "She said
to her," viz., some other woman). Ĝi vundis sin = It wounded
itself (Ĝi vundis ĝin
would mean "It wounded it," viz., some
other animal). Ili mortigis sin = They killed themselves. Li
pensis en si mem, ke ... = He thought to (in) himself that ... La du
fratoj renkontas la rabistojn: la fratoj atakas kaj vundas ilin, sed,
tiel farante, ili vundas sin (or, sin mem) = The two brothers meet
the robbers: the brothers attack and wound them, but, in so doing,
they wound themselves. Mia fratino havas amikinon, kiu faras ĉion
por si, kaj nenion por ŝi = My sister has a friend, who does
everything for herself, and nothing for her. Oni kelkfoje tro
laŭdas sin = One (or people) sometimes praises oneself (or
praise themselves) too much (see conjugation of a reflexive verb,
par. 170).
129. The pronoun "it" is not expressed with impersonal verbs (see
par. 164).
Examples.—Kiu estas tie? Estas mi = Who is there? It is I.
Neĝas = It snows. Pluvis = It rained. Necesas, ke oni manĝu =
It is necessary to eat.
130. Possessive Pronouns are formed by adding the adjectival A to
the personal pronouns. They are essentially adjectives, and follow
the adjectival rules as to the formation of the plural and the
accusative.
131. They are mia = my, mine, via = your, yours, thy,
thine (cia = thy, thine, like its personal pronoun, ci, is
rarely used), lia = his, ŝia = her, hers, ĝia = its,
nia = our, ours, ilia = their, theirs, sia = his
(own), her (own), hers, its (own), their (own),
theirs, one’s (own).
Examples.—Mia patro, via frato, lia fratino, ŝia onklo, kaj iliaj
onklinoj, estas en la domo = My father, your brother, his sister,
her uncle, and their aunts are in the house. Mi vidis vian libron,
lian bastonon, ŝian ombrelon, kaj ilian keston en la stacidomo = I
saw your book, his stick, her umbrella, and their box in the station.
Mi havas viajn librojn = I have your books. Ĝia koloro estas
ruĝa = Its colour is red. Mia fratino renkontis vian fraton kaj
viajn amikojn = My sister met your brother and your friends.
132. When a possessive pronoun stands alone, as in sentences like the
following, it may or may not be preceded by the article la, at the
writer’s option, but many authors prefer to omit the article on the
ground that it is superfluous.
Examples.—Ĉar ni ĉiuj havas (or, ĉar ĉiu el ni havas) unu
vortaron, prenu (la) vian kaj lasu (la) mian = Since we have each a
dictionary, take yours and leave mine. Ŝiaj infanoj estas pli
grandaj, ol (la) viaj = Her children are bigger than yours.
Note in the first example that ĉiuj is in the plural because it is
in apposition to ni (see par. 69 (c)).
133. Mia is sometimes placed after a noun to denote affection.
Examples.—Patrino mia = Mother mine, or Mother dear. Fratino mia
= Sister dear.
134. When a possessive pronoun refers to two or more nouns, it may,
as in English, be repeated or not, but if it is not repeated the
possessive pronoun is usually put in the plural.
Example.—Lia patro, lia patrino, kaj lia fratino, or, liaj patro,
patrino, kaj fratino, estis en la domo = His father, his mother, and
his sister were in the house.
134 (a). Personal pronouns, preceded by the preposition al, are
sometimes used in a possessive sense.
Examples.—Mi kovris al mi la orelojn = I covered my (to myself
the) ears. Li fermis al si la okulojn = He closed his (to himself
the) eyes (see also par. 100).
135. Sia, Lia, etc.—Great care must be taken not to use sia,
when the sense requires one of the other possessives of the 3rd
person, or vice versâ. Sia can only refer to the subject of
the sentence or proposition in which it occurs, and being
reflexive, it
can never form part of the subject of a sentence,
as:—Li diris al ni, ke lia (not, sia) hundo ĵus mortis = He
told us that his dog had just died. Like its root si, it is used
for the 3rd person, singular or plural, and may represent "his (own),
her (own), hers, its (own), their (own), theirs, or one’s (own)."
Since sia, being reflexive, can never form part of the subject
of a sentence, we cannot say Li kaj sia edzino iris Parizon,
because li and edzino are equally subjects of the same clause.
But if we substitute kun for kaj, then li becomes the sole
subject, and we can correctly say, Li kun sia edzino iris
Parizon, or, Li iris Parizon kun sia edzino = He went to Paris
with his wife. If we use kaj we must say, Li kaj lia edzino
iris Parizon = He and his wife went to Paris.
136. In the four following examples sia refers to the subject of
the sentence:—
Mia patrino forgesis sian libron = My mother forgot (or, has
forgotten) her book. Tiuj infanoj perdis siajn gepatrojn = Those
children have lost their parents. La hundo amas sian mastron = The
dog loves its master. Oni devas ami sian najbaron, kiel sin mem =
One must love one’s neighbour as oneself. N.B.—Sin is here in the
accusative owing to ellipsis, the words oni amas after kiel being
understood (see par. 105).
137. In the following three sentences the possessive pronoun does
not refer to the subject of the sentence, and therefore we use
lia, ŝia, ĝia, or ilia, as the case may be:—
Li vidis mian amikon kaj lian edzinon = He saw my friend and his
(his friend’s) wife. Ŝi venis al mi hieraŭ, por ke mi redonu
ŝiajn leterojn al ŝi = She came to me yesterday in order that I
might return her letters to her. La reĝo amas Johanon kaj lian
filon = The king loves John and his son.
N.B.—Here the English does not show whether it is John’s son or his
own son whom the king loves, but in Esperanto it is clear it is
John’s son, otherwise it would be
sian filon; lian filon is in the accusative here, because the
conjunction kaj connects like cases (see par. 266).
(a). Note in the following examples how the possessive varies in
accordance with the construction of the sentence.
El ĉiuj siaj amikinoj, ŝi plej amas Marion = Of all her friends
(female), she loves Mary best. (Here siaj refers to ŝi).
El ĉiuj ŝiaj amikinoj, Mario estas le plej amata = Of all her
friends, Mary is the most loved. (Here ŝiaj refers to some woman
not mentioned.)
Leginte sian libron, li ekdormis = After reading (having read) his
book, he fell asleep. (Here sian refers to li, understood in
leginte = When he had read his book, he ...). Leginte lian
libron, li ekdormis = After reading his book, he fell asleep. (Here
lian refers to some man not mentioned, who might have lent him the
book.)
Johano, legante sian libron, venkiĝis de dormo = John, while
reading his book, was (became) overcome by sleep.
138. The following are sentences more complicated, showing the
advantage of Esperanto over English, or indeed over most national
languages, in respect of its great clearness of expression:—
Petro skribis al Paŭlo, ke li konduku al li sian hundon = Peter
wrote to Paul to bring him his dog (sian refers to Paul because
li = he (Paul) becomes the subject, and sia always, as we have
said, refers to the subject of its own particular clause; if,
therefore, lian had been the possessive, it would have been Peter’s
dog.)
Post kiam la reĝo mortis, lia filo edziĝis kun sia/lia kuzino
= After the king died, his son married his cousin. Here sia would
refer to filo, the son’s cousin, but lia to reĝo, the king’s
cousin.
Mia patrino petis sian filinon, ke ŝi donu al sia/ŝia fratino
sian/ŝian libron. This sentence in English, whichever of the
possessives be used, would be "My mother requested her daughter to
give (that she give) to her sister her book."
Now the mother is the first subject in this sentence, therefore sian
filinon is the mother’s daughter (ŝian would mean someone else’s
daughter). But afterwards ŝi (the daughter) becomes the subject,
therefore sia fratino would be the daughter’s sister, and ŝia
fratino the mother’s. For the remainder of the sentence ŝi (the
daughter) still remains the subject, therefore sian libron would be
the daughter’s book, and ŝian libron the sister’s or the mother’s
book. Ties libron would definitely specify it as the sister’s book.
138 (a). From the examples given in paragraphs 128, 135, 136, and
138, we see that the reflexive pronoun si and the possessive sia
always refer to the subject (noun or pronoun) of their own
clause.
(b). Si and sia are likewise used when the noun or pronoun to
which they refer is not expressed, but only understood.
Example.—Tio estas nova metodo brosi sian (or, la) ĉapelon! =
That is a new method of brushing one’s hat!
(c). Phrases introduced by an infinitive or a participle may be
regarded as new sentences, the subject of which is mentally supplied:
i.e., the infinitive or the participle may be expanded to make the
full sentence implied.
Examples of Infinitive.—Estas bone ne trompi (ke oni ne trompu)
sin = It is well not to deceive oneself. La patrino lasis
Marion legi (ke ŝi legu) sian libron (Mary’s book); ŝian
libron (the mother’s book). La oficiro petis Aŭguston rigardi
(ke li rigardu) lin (him) sin (himself). La patro petis sian
filon, helpi (ke la filo helpu) sian (the son’s) amikon;
lian (the father’s) amikon.
Examples of Participle.—La reĝo ordonis, ke ĉiuj renkontante
(kiam ili renkontis) lin, eliru. La princo montris viron,
starantan post li. La knabo vidis siajn fratinojn, ludantajn
(kiuj ludas) per sia (their own) pupo—per lia (with his)
pupo. La reĝo forveturis, ne sciiginte (kaj ne sciigis) sian
ministron pri sia (the king’s) devo—pri lia (the minister’s)
devo.
(d). Boirac names lia, ŝia, ĝia, etc., the direct or normal
form of the pronoun, "La rekta formo," and sia the secondary or
accessory form, "flanka kaj akcesora." He points out that where the
use of the normal form could cause no possible ambiguity, the use of
the reflexive form, though always advisable if justified by rule, is
nevertheless not obligatory. It is even possible, as shown by
Millidge, that the non-use of si may in some cases be felt to be
somewhat clearer than its use, e.g., "La Ĥino legas siajn skribajn
signojn en sia dialekto, kaj la aliaj popoloj de Azio legas tiujn
samajn signojn en ilia (instead of sia) lingvo (F.K., p. 258).
In any case it is better, in case of doubt, to use the normal form.
It is worse to use the reflexive form when it should not be used,
than to omit it when it might be used.
139. The 45 correlative words (see table, par. 147) form a very
important part in the construction of the Esperanto language. Their
uses and meanings are very easily learnt and remembered, since they
have been exceedingly cleverly devised on a simple and uniform plan.
They are all to be found in the list of Primary Words given in Part V.
140. They consist of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and adverbs. Many
of them can be applied to denote not only one word, but also
expressions which require several English words to define clearly.
141. The words in the table (par. 147) are placed in series
horizontally and vertically. All the words in each of the vertical
series commence with the same letter, and all in each horizontal
series have the same termination. It will be seen that the letter I
is the first letter in the first vertical series, and that this is a
central letter in each of the other words in the table. The first
letter of a word conveys an idea of its meaning, and the terminal
letters following I show how that idea is applied, and consequently
the full meaning of the word.
(a). The initial letters convey the following ideas:—
- I- that the word is "indefinite."
- Ĉ- that the word is "distributive" or "collective."
- K- that the word is "interrogative" or "relative."
- NEN- that the word is "negative" (nen- = ne, not,
and N added for euphony).
- T- that the word is "demonstrative."
(b). The terminal letters following I denote that the idea is
to be applied, in accordance with the termination, as follows:—
- -A in relation to "quality" or "the kind of" (adjectival).
- -AL in relation to "motive" or "reason for" (adverbial).
- -AM in relation to "time" (adverbial).
- -E in relation to "place" (adverbial).
- -EL in relation to "manner" (adverbial).
- -ES in relation to "possession" (pronominal).
- -O in relation to "a thing" (substantival or pronominal).
- -OM in relation to "quantity" or "number of" (adverbial).
- -U in relation to "person" or "thing specified". (pronominal or adjectival).
142. The correlative words are all complete in themselves, but some
of them can be used as root-words, taking grammatical terminations
when required by the sense to be conveyed. Those ending in the vowels
A, E, O, U, must not necessarily be presumed to be the
parts of speech these letters indicate; the letters are not
grammatical terminations, they simply show, as before stated, how
the idea conveyed in the preceding letters is to be applied. Those
ending in a vowel all take the accusative N, and those ending in
A and U also take the plural J.
Theoretically it is possible for the words ending in O also to take
the plural J; but in practice this is seldom useful.
143. The demonstrative pronouns, tio = that (thing), tiu =
that one, the former, and sometimes ĉio, are followed by the
separate word ĉi = near, to express the demonstrative pronoun,
"this." Ĉi is invariable, but tio and tiu can be inflected as
before stated. Thus tio = that (thing), tio ĉi = this
(thing) (lit., "that here"), tion ĉi (accusative) = this
(thing). Tiu = that one, the former, tiu ĉi = this one,
the latter. Tiuj = those, tiuj ĉi = these (lit., "those
here"). Often ĉi is placed first, as:—Ĉi tiu = this one. In
fact, other things being equal, it is preferable to place ĉi
before rather than after the t- word, though both forms are equally
correct. Ĉio ĉi = all this.
144. The adverb, tie = there, is also followed by ĉi to
denote "here." Thus tie = there, tie ĉi = here, tien
(accusative) = thither, tien ĉi = hither. Occasionally ĉi
is placed first, thus: ĉi tie, ĉi tien.
145. The interrogative or relative series (viz., those commencing
with K) may be followed by the word ajn = ever, as kia ajn =
whatever kind of, kial ajn = for whatever reason, kiam ajn =
whenever, kie ajn = wherever, kiel ajn = however, kies
ajn = whosesoever, kio ajn = whatever, kiom ajn = however
much, whatever quantity, kiu ajn = whoever, whichever.
Some writers use ajn after other correlatives, but Dr. Zamenhof
himself has rarely used it except after the series kia, kial,
etc. However, he does not say it is wrong to extend its use, for when
asked the question whether it could be employed after the series
ia, ial, etc., he replied that it could, because, in Esperanto,
any word could be combined with any other. See par. 158 (c) (d).
146. Grammatical terminations and suffixes may be added to the
correlatives if required, thus making them nouns, adjectives, verbs,
adverbs, etc.,
as shown in the following examples. The hyphens are
given to show the construction of the words, but should not be used
in writing.
Ĉiam-a = Everlasting, continual. Ĉiam-e = Everlastingly,
forever. Ĉie-a = Of everywhere. Ĉi-tie-a (ĉi tiea) = Of
here. Tie-a = Of there. Ĉi-tie-ulo (ĉi tieulo) = A man of
this place. Tie-ulo = A man of that place. Kiom-a = Of what
quantity. Kioma horo estas? = What time is it? Neni-igi = To
reduce to nothing, to destroy completely. Neni-iĝi = To become
nothing, to vanish. Tiam-a = Of then, of that time. Tiam-ulo = A
man of that time, a contemporary. La kial-o = The why and
wherefore, the reason (cause). Tiel-e = In that way.
147. TABLE OF CORRELATIVE WORDS.
| Indefinite. | Distributive, General or Collective. |
Interrogative and Relative. | Negative. | Demonstrative. |
Quality
Kind of
(adjectival) |
IA
some (any) kind or sort of
some (any)
of some kind |
ĈIA
every kind of
every
of every kind |
KIA
what kind of?
of what kind?
what a!
... as |
NENIA
no kind of
no, no such
of no kind
(not any kind of) |
TIA
that kind of
such a
of that kind |
Motive
Reason for
(adverbial) |
IAL
for some (any) reason or cause |
ĈIAL
for every reason/cause
for all reasons |
KIAL
for what reason/cause
why? wherefore |
NENIAL
for no reason/cause |
TIAL
for that reason/cause
therefore |
Time
(adverbial) |
IAM
at some (any) time
ever
once |
ĈIAM
always
every time
for all time
ever |
KIAM
at what time?
when |
NENIAM
at no time
never |
TIAM
at that time
then |
Place
(adverbial) |
IE
in some (any) place
somewhere
(anywhere) |
ĈIE
in every place
everywhere |
KIE
in what place
where |
NENIE
in no place
nowhere
(not anywhere) |
TIE
in that place
there
yonder |
Manner
(adverbial) |
IEL
in some manner/way
somehow (anyhow)
(in any manner) |
ĈIEL
(in) every manner/way
(in) every way
all ways |
KIEL
in what manner/way
how?
... as
like |
NENIEL
in no manner/way
nohow
by no means
not at all |
TIEL
in that manner/way
thus, so, like (that)
as ...
in such a manner |
Possession
(pronominal) |
IES
somebody’s
(someone’s)
(anyone’s) |
ĈIES
everybody’s
everyone’s
each one’s
of each, of all |
KIES
whose
of which |
NENIES
no one’s
nobody’s
of none |
TIES
that one’s
of that
of those |
Thing
(not specified)
(substantival or pronominal) |
IO
something
(anything) |
ĈIO
everything
all things
all |
KIO
what (thing)
which |
NENIO
nothing
not anything |
TIO
that (thing) |
Quantity
(adverbial) |
IOM
some quantity
somewhat
rather, some
a little, at all
(any) |
ĈIOM
every quantity
all, the whole
all of it |
KIOM
what quantity
how much
how many |
NENIOM
no quantity
none
none at all |
TIOM
that quantity
so much/many
as much/many |
Individuality
Person or thing
(pronominal or adjectival) |
IU
some one
(anyone) |
ĈIU
each one, each
everybody
ĉiuj=all,
all the ... |
KIU
which one
who, he who
which, that |
NENIU
no one
nobody |
TIU
that one
the former |
148. In the following examples (pars. 149–157) we have taken the
correlative words in the table in the nine horizontal series, since
in this way we can best show how some of the words are used in pairs.
149. Series ending in A (quality, kind of), adjectival.
- Ia = some sort of, some, a, an.
- Ĉia = every (each) kind of, every sort of.
- Kia = what a! what kind of? of what kind, ... as.
- Nenia = no, no such, no kind of, of no kind, not any kind
of.
- Ia ajn, of any kind (whatever).
- Tia = such a, that kind of, of that kind.
- Tia ... kia = such ... as.
Examples.—Ĉu vi ne havas ian libron, kiu klarigos tion? = Have
you not some book which will explain that?
Mi havas ian ideon kiel ĝin fari = I have some (or, an) idea how
to do it.
Ekster ĉia dubo = Beyond any (every sort of) doubt.
Tiaj frazoj troviĝas en ĉiaj libroj = Such (kind of) phrases are
found in all kinds (sorts) of (or, in any) books.
Ni ne scias, kiel ili fariĝis tiaj, kiaj ili estas = We do not
know how they became what (such as) they are.
Nenia antaŭa sperto estas necesa = No (kind of) previous
experience is necessary.
Tian virinon oni ĉiam estimas = Such a woman one always esteems.
Mi donis al li la libron tian, kia ĝi estas = I gave him the book
such as it was.
Kiun aĝon li havas? = How old is he? (what age has he?)
Kia estas la vetero? = How (what kind) is the weather?
Komencante de (k)ia ajn momento = Commencing at any (whatever)
moment.
Kia bela domo! = What a beautiful house!
Kiaj estas la kondiĉoj? = What are the stipulations (or terms)?
Ili estas fieraj, ni ne estas tiaj = They are proud, we are not so.
Ŝi eksentis ion tian, kion ŝi mem komence ne povis kompreni = She
began to feel something such as she herself at first could not
understand.
Mi ĵus eksciis iajn aferojn, kiuj ne plaĉas al mi = I have just
learnt some things that do not please me (that I do not like).
Jen estas la monumento tia, kian oni priskribis = Here is the
monument such as they described.
Via aĝo estas tia sama, kiel tiu de via frato = Your age is the
same as your brother’s.
N.B.—Do not confuse the series ending in A with that ending in
U.
Examples.—Kian libron vi bezonas? = What (sort of) book do you
want? Kiun libron vi bezonas? = What (or which) book do you want?
Tia homo = Such a man, that sort of man. Tiu homo = That man.
Ĉiaj libroj = All (kinds of) books. Ĉiuj libroj = All (or,
all the) books. Mi ĝin prenos, kia ajn ĝi estas = I shall take it
whatever (sort of thing) it is.
150. Series ending in AL (motive, reason for), adverbial.
- Ial = for some reason or cause (for any reason)
- Ĉial = for all reasons, for every reason, for every cause.
- Ial ajn, for any reason (whatever).
- Kial = why? wherefore, for what reason.
- Nenial = for no reason, or cause.
- Tial = therefore, for that reason.
Examples.—Ial li subite forlasis Londonon = For some reason he
suddenly left London.
Ĉial tio estas la plej bona = For every reason that is the best.
Kial vi ne respondis? = Why did you not answer?
Li nenial ĉesis skribi al mi = He for no reason ceased writing to
me.
Ŝi neniam volis sekvi mian konsilon, tial mi forlasis ŝin = She
never would follow my advice, therefore I forsook her.
Mi ne povas imagi kial ajn li ĝin faris = I cannot imagine why
ever he did it.
151. Series ending in AM (time), adverbial.
- Iam = ever, at some time (any time), once, one day, once
upon a time.
- Ĉiam = always, for all time, ever, at every time.
- Kiam = when, at what time, as (relating to time).
- Neniam = never, at no time.
- Tiam = then, at that time.
Examples.—Se iam mi venos = If ever I come (shall come).
Ĉiam skribu legeble = Always write legibly.
En tiaj okazoj ĉiam mankas io = On such occasions something is
always wanting.
Kiam vi skribis tiel? = When did you write like that (thus)?
Kiam la pastro venos, diru al li la veron = When the priest comes
(shall come), tell him the truth.
Tiam, kiam mi estis riĉa, mi ne estis feliĉa, or, Kiam mi estis
riĉa, tiam mi ne estis feliĉa = At that time when (or, when) I
was rich I was not happy, or, When I was rich then I was not happy,
or the sentence might be simply Kiam mi estis riĉa, mi ne estis
feliĉa = When I was rich I was not happy.
Mi neniam skribas longajn leterojn = I never write long letters.
Mi neniam aŭdis tion = I never heard that.
Sendu lin al mi, kiam ajn li venos = Send him to me whenever he
comes.
Kiam ajn li venos? = Whenever will he come?
N.B.—Kiam is used after tiam, and any word denoting "time"
except antaŭ = before, when ol is generally used, though
kiam is used occasionally after antaŭ also (see par. 259 (3)).
Examples.—Unutage, kiam = One day, when. Iun tagon, kiam = On a
day, when. Tuj kiam = As soon as, immediately when. Samtempe,
kiam = At the same time, when. De l’ tempo kiam = From the time
when, since. Post kiam = After. Antaŭ ol li venis = Before he
came.
152. Series ending in E (place), adverbial.
- Ie = somewhere (anywhere), in some (any) place.
- Ĉie = everywhere, in every place, in all places.
- Ie ajn, anywhere (whatever).
- Kie = where, in what place, in which place.
- Tie = there, yonder, in that place. Ĉi tie or tie ĉi =
here, in this place.
Examples.—Mi ne povis trovi mian libron ie en la ĉambro = I could
not find my book anywhere in the room.
Ĉu vi metis ĝin ien? = Did you put it anywhere (somewhere)?
Ĉie mi trovis amikojn = Everywhere I found friends.
Tion oni povas aĉeti ĉie = That can be bought (one can buy)
anywhere (everywhere).
Kien vi iras? = Where are you going?
Mi iras nenien = I am going nowhere.
Kie estas la poŝtoficejo? = Where is the post office?
Ĝi estas tie, kie staras tiu domo = It is there where that house
stands.
Kien vi iras? = Whither are you going?
Mi iras tien = I am going thither.
Ĉu vi estas ĉi tie? = Are you here?
Li venas ĉi tien = He is coming here.
Kie ajn li estas? = Wherever is he?
Kie ajn li estas, li ne estas tie ĉi = Wherever he is, he is not
here.
153. Series in EL (manner), adverbial.
- Iel—somehow (anyhow), in some way, in some manner.
- Iel ajn, in any way (whatever).
- Ĉiel = in every way, in every manner, in all ways.
- Kiel = how, in what manner, like, ... as.
- Neniel = nohow, in no manner, not at all, by no means.
- Tiel = thus, in that manner, like (that), so, as ...
- Tiel ... kiel (in comparison) = as ... as; so ... as.
Examples.—Iel li ĉiel sukcesas = Somehow he succeeds in every
way.
Mi havis nenian ideon, kiel ĝin fari = I had no idea how to do it.
Kiel vi fartas? = How do you do? or, How are you?
Ŝi neniel povis lin kompreni tiel longe, kiel li parolis la lingvon
francan = She could nohow (or, not at all) understand him as long
as he spoke in the French language.
Same kiel la prudento estas donita al la homo, tiel la instinkto
estas donita al la besto = Just as reason has been given to man, so
instinct has been given to beasts.
Kaj tiel plu (often written k.t.p.) = And so on, and so forth.
Kiel eble plej baldaŭ (k.e.p.b.) = As soon as possible.
Li estas tiel forta, kiel vi = He is as strong as you.
Kiel ajn malmulte = However little.
154. Series ending in ES (possession), pronominal; relate to thing
or person, singular or plural.
- Ies = somebody’s, someone’s (anyone’s, anybody’s).
- Ĉies = everyone’s, each one’s, of each, of all.
- Kies = whose, of whom, of which.
- Nenies = no one’s, nobody’s, of none.
- Ties = that one’s, of that, of those.
Examples.—Ĉies devo estas nenies = Anybody’s (everybody’s) duty
is nobody’s.
Ies perdo ne estas ĉiam ies gajno = Someone’s loss is not always
somebody’s gain.
Ĉies ideo estis diversa = Everyone’s idea was different.
Kies libro estas tiu ĉi? = Whose book is this?
Kies plumon vi uzas? = Whose pen are you using?
La domo, kies tegmenton vi vidas, apartenas al mia patro = The
house the roof of which you see belongs to my father.
El kies ĉiuj paŝoj, oni povas konkludi, ke ili estas lacaj = From
all of whose steps we can conclude that they are tired.
Tiu libro estas tre malpura, kies ajn ĝi estas = That book is very
dirty, whosesoever it is.
Ties opinio ne multe valoras = That one’s opinion is not worth
much.
Mi neniam sekvas ties konsilon = I never take (follow) that one’s
(his, her, their) advice.
N.B.—Be careful not to use kies for "of which," when these words
do not mean possession. We cannot say La afero kies ni parolis for
"The affair of which we spoke"; we must say La afero, pri kiu ni
parolis.
155. Series ending in O (thing (not specified) indefinite),
substantival or pronominal.
- Io = something.
- Io ajn, anything (whatever).
- Ĉio = everything, all things, all.
- Kio = what (thing), which.
- Nenio = nothing, not any thing.
- Tio = that (thing). Ĉi tio or tio ĉi = this (thing).
Examples.—Kio estas tio, kion vi skribas? = What is that (or,
that which) you are writing?
Io estis sub la tablo, sed mi ne povis vidi ion tie = Something was
under the table, but I could not see anything (something) there.
Li vidis ion, kion li tre amis = He saw something he liked very
much.
Estas tempo por ĉio = There is a time for everything.
Ĉio (tio) ĉi montras, ke ... = All this shows that ...
Ĉio, kion mi havas, estas (la) via = All I have is yours.
Kio estas tio ĉi, kion mi vidas? = What is this that I see?
Nenio estas preta = Nothing is ready.
Mi nenion trovis = I found nothing.
Tio havas malbonan odoron, kio ajn ĝi estas = It (that) has a bad
smell, whatever it is.
Li ne diris eĉ unu vorton pri ĉio tio ĉi (or, ĉio ĉi) al
iu = He did not say even one word about all this to anyone.
156. Series ending in OM (quantity), adverbial.
- Iom = somewhat, some quantity, rather, a little, some.
- Ĉiom = all, all of it, the whole, every quantity.
- Kiom = how much, how many, what quantity.
- Neniom = none, none at all, no quantity.
- Tiom = so much, so many, as much, as many, that quantity.
- Tiom ... kiom = as much (many) ... as.
Examples.—La vetero estas iom pli varma = The weather is somewhat
(a little) warmer.
Jen estas sukero, prenu iom, sed ne ĉiom = Here is sugar, take
some, but not all (the whole).
Kiom da ĉevaloj vi havas? = How many horses have you?
Mi havas neniom = I have none (none at all).
Tiom pli bone = So much the better.
Tiom estas malfacile memori = So much is difficult to remember.
Donu al mi tiom da akvo, kiom da vino = Give me as much water as
wine.
Kiom vi scias = As far (much) as you know.
Kiom eble = As far (much) (many) as possible.
Kiom ajn da teo tiu kesto povas enhavi, tiu ĉi povas enhavi duoble
tiom = Whatever quantity (however much) of tea that chest will (can)
hold, this one will hold twice as much.
157. Series ending in U (persons or specified things), pronominal
or adjectival.
- Iu = someone, somebody.
- Iu ajn, anyone (whatever).
- Ĉiu = everyone, each one. Ĉiuj = all, all (of) the....
- Kiu = who, which, that, which one.
- Neniu = nobody, no one, no.
- Tiu = that (one), the former. Ĉi tiu, or tiu ĉi = this
one, the latter. Tiuj, those; Ĉi tiuj, these.
Examples.—Iu estas tie = Someone is there.
Mi ne vidis iun = I did not see anyone (someone).
Ĉiu aĝo havas siajn devojn = Each age has its duties.
Ŝi legis ĉiun libron, kiun ŝi povis ricevi = She read every book
she could get.
Kiu estas en la ĝardeno? = Who is in the garden?
Mi konis ĉiun viron, kiun mi renkontis = I knew every man whom I
met.
Mi legis ĉiujn librojn, kiujn vi pruntis al mi = I read all the
books that you lent to me.
Tiu pano estas freŝa, sed tiu ĉi estas pli freŝa = That bread is
new, but this is newer.
Tiu, kiu havas la harojn nigrajn = He who has the black hair.
Neniu estis tie, tial mi vidis neniun = No one was there, therefore
I saw nobody.
Tiu homo, kiu ajn li estas, ne estas malsaĝulo = That man, whoever
he is, is not a fool.
Ŝi fariĝis edzino de iu bankiero, kiun ŝi konis pli bone, ol
ĉiun alian = She became wife of a certain (someone, a) banker,
whom she knew better than anyone (everyone) else.
Ĉiu vorto povas esti kombinata kun ĉiu alia = Any (each) word
can be combined with any (each) other word.
Li pli sincere malĝojis je li, ol (k)iu ajn el liaj parencoj =
He was more sincerely sorry for him, than any of his relations.
La pafilo povos en ĉiu tempo (ĉiam) esti ŝargita = The gun
can be (will be able to be) loaded at any time.
Li ne permesos al (k)iu ajn tion fari = He will not allow
anyone (whatever) to do that (see par. 158 (d)).
158. General Remarks.—The foregoing remarks on the correlative
words show the importance of a
correct knowledge of their true
meanings. Twenty or more of them will be found in nearly every page
of the "Krestomatio." Note the following difference in meaning of
those ending in:—
(a). -AL and -EL. It will be noticed that the series AL
represent phrases in English commencing with "for," as:—"for some
reason," "for every reason," etc.; whereas in the series EL the
phrases commence with "in," as:—"in some way," "in every way." Bear
in mind that -AL relates to motive, and -EL to manner. Note
the difference of meaning in tial and tiel when followed by ke.
Tial, ke = for the reason that, forasmuch as, because that.
Tiel, ke = in such a manner that, so that. Some beginners seem
to think that kial and kiel have no difference in meaning, which
is equivalent to using "why" and "how" indiscriminately. Kial li
faras tion? = Why (for what reason) is he doing that? Kiel li
faras tion? = How (in what way) is he doing that?
(b). -O and -U. The series O is rarely used in the plural; it
relates to things which are not mentioned by name or referred to by a
personal pronoun. Examples.—Kio estas tio? = What is that?
Kiu estas tiu? = Who is that? Tiu estas mia frato, kiu
promenadas kun sia edzino = That is my brother who is walking with
his wife. Tio estas, kion mi bezonis = That is what I wanted.
Tio, kio kreskas en mia ĝardeno, estas arbo = That which is
growing in my garden is a tree. Tiu arbo, kiu kreskas en mia
ĝardeno, estas kverko = That tree, which is growing in my garden,
is an oak.
Tio is sometimes used for "it," relating to both persons and
things, as:—Tio (or, ĝi) estis mi, kiu lin vidis = It was I
who saw him. Tio estas ponto = It (that) is a bridge.
(c). -I: "ANY" (= SOME). It will be seen from the table of
Correlative Words on pages 98, 99, that the words in the column
commencing with I have as their main idea indefiniteness,
corresponding to the English some (or other). Thus: Li estas ie
= he is somewhere (or other). Mi manĝos ion = I shall eat
something (or other). Iu faris tion = Someone (or other)
did that.
In English, especially in a sentence which is negative,
interrogative, or suppositional, the word any is often used in this
sense instead of the word some. In such cases (as shown in brackets
in the table) the i- words may be translated with any; thus: Ĉu
vi manĝis ion? = Did you eat anything (something)? Mi ne
manĝos ion = I shall not eat
anything. Se li estus ie en la ĉambro = If he were anywhere
(somewhere) in the room. Ĉu iu faris tion? = Did anyone
(someone) do that? Mi ne konas iun, kiu povus = I do not know
anyone who could. Se iu faris tion = If anyone did that....
(d). "ANY" (= ANY WHATEVER). Sometimes, however, the word any
is used not with the meaning of some (as in the preceding
paragraph), but with the meaning any whatever. Take, for example,
the questions: What will you eat for breakfast? Where shall we go?
The answers might be: Oh, anything (you like, it doesn’t matter
what); and Anywhere (you like). This meaning of any (any
whatever) may be expressed in various ways: (1) By a k-word
followed by ajn, thus: Kion ajn, Kien ajn (the words vi volas
or similar words being understood). (2) By an i-word followed by
ajn, thus: Ion ajn, Ien ajn. Method 1 is usually adopted by
Zamenhof, but method 2 is increasingly used. (3) Sometimes a
ĉ-word may be used. Thus, the sentence: Anyone could do that,
may be translated: Kiu ajn (or, Iu ajn, or, Ĉiu) povus tion
fari.
(e). AJN. The word ajn is used not only as shown in the
preceding paragraph, but also after the k-series, to correspond to
the English -ever (see par. 248 (b)). It is also occasionally
used with the ĉ-series and the nen-series, thus: Mi serĉis lin
ĉie ajn = I looked for him absolutely everywhere. Li estas nenie
ajn = He was nowhere at all, absolutely nowhere.
159. There are no irregular verbs in Esperanto. Every verb is
conjugated exactly the same.
160. The following are the grammatical terminations of all verbs,
from which it will be seen that there are only three tenses (see
pars. 214–236), three moods (see pars. 171–202), and six
participles (see pars. 203–213).
| -AS, | Present, as: | Mi faras = I do, or, make. |
| -IS, | Past, as: | Vi faris = you did, or, have (or, had) done. |
| -OS, | Future, as: | Ili faros = they will do. |
CONDITIONAL, or US MOOD.
-US, as: Se mi farus = if I did, or, should (or,
would) do, or, were to do.
IMPERATIVE, or U MOOD.
-U, as: Diru al li, ke li tion faru = tell him to do that
(lit., that he do that).
Ni faru tion = let us do that.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
-I, as: Fari = to do.
| -ANTA, | Active, Present, as: | Faranta = doing. |
| | Farante (adv.) = in (when, or, other prep.) doing. |
| -INTA, | Active, Past, as: | Farinta = having done. |
| | Farinte (adv.) = in having done. |
| -ONTA, | Active, Future, as: | Faronta = (being) about to do. |
| | Faronte (adv.) = on being about to do. |
| -ATA, | Passive, Present, as: | Farata = being done, or, done. |
| | Farate (adv.) = on being done. |
| -ITA, | Passive, Past, as: | Farita = been done, or, having been done. |
| | Farite (adv.) = on having been done. |
| -OTA, | Passive, Future, as: | Farota = (being) about to be done. |
| | Farote (adv.) = on being about to be done. |
N.B.—For examples of the noun-participles see par. 209.
There are two classes of verbs—transitive and intransitive.
161. A transitive verb has two forms or voices, the active and
the passive.
(a). A verb is in the active voice when the subject is acting
upon the object. The object then, being governed by the verb, must be
in the accusative case; as:—Johano batis la hundon = John beat
the dog. Here Johano is the subject acting upon hundon, the
object; therefore hundon is in the accusative.
(b). A transitive verb is in the passive voice when the subject
is acted upon; as:—La hundo estis batata de Johano = The dog was
(being) beaten by John. The preposition "by" or "with," preceding
the complement of a verb in the passive voice, is de or per. De
is used for the agent, and per for the means or manner, as:—La
domo konstruita de mia patro estas kovrita per ardezoj = The house
built by my father is (having been) covered with slates.
162. An intransitive verb expresses an action confined to the
actor, as:—Johano dormas = John sleeps, or, is sleeping.
Intransitive verbs have therefore no object and no passive voice.
163. There is but one auxiliary verb in Esperanto, esti = to
be. This verb is used to form the passive voice, and also all the
compound tenses of the active voice. The verb havi = to have is
in no sense an auxiliary, but is an ordinary active verb denoting
ownership, and governing the accusative case, as: Mi havas libron =
I have a book.
In Esperanto the following and other verbs are often used where
English would usually employ "to be," viz., kuŝi = to lie;
sidi = to be situate; sin trovi = to find oneself; troviĝi
= to be found; stari = to stand; farti, or, stati = to be
(well or ill).
Examples.—La krajono kuŝas (estas) sur la tablo = The pencil is
(lies) on the table. Sur la kameno staris (estis) fera kaldrono, en
kiu sin trovis (estis) bolanta akvo; tra la fenestro, kiu sin trovis
(estis) apud la pordo, la vaporo iris sur la korton = On the hearth
was (stood) an iron kettle, in which was (found itself) boiling
water; through the window, which was near the door, steam went out
into (on to) the yard. Kiel statas via tuso? = How is your cough?
164. Verbs used impersonally (senpersone) express a fact or
action without indicating any person as the subject or actor. In
English they are used only in the third person singular, preceded by
"it," but in Esperanto they are entirely impersonal. The following
are cases of their impersonal use:—
(a). Verbs which relate to the weather.
Examples.—Pluvas = It rains. Pluvos = It will rain. Fulmis =
It lightened. Neĝus = It would snow. Hajlis = It hailed.
(b). Verbs which are generally used with the subject expressed, but
occasionally without.
Examples.—Okazas = It happens. Ŝajnos = It will seem.
Prosperis al mi trovi = It was my fortune to find.
(c). The verb esti = to be, when used with an adjective-adverb,
or passive participle-adverb.
Examples.—Estas pli bone forkuri = It is better to run away.
Estas dirite, ke ... = It is said that ...
(d). In the compound tenses the participle takes the adverbial
form, since there is no noun or pronoun with which it can agree (see
par. 245).
Examples.—Se estus pluvinte hieraŭ, ni ne estus povintaj eliri =
If it had (should have) rained yesterday, we should not have been
able to go out. Mi tondigos la herbon, kiam estos pluvinte = I
shall get the grass cut, when it has (will have) rained.
165. Reflexive verbs show the action of the subject on itself. They
are used only when the subject really acts on itself, and not, as in
many other languages, on other occasions (see par. 128 on the use of
the reflexive pronoun si, and par. 170, conjugation of a reflexive
verb).
Examples.—Mi lavas min = I wash myself. Li lavis sin = He washed
himself. Vi razos vin = You will shave yourself. Ili vestis sin =
They dressed themselves.
166. When there are more subjects than one, and the act goes from one
to another of the subjects, the word reciproke, or the expression
unu la alian, may be used. With the latter the personal pronoun is
not repeated.
Examples.—Ili batis sin reciproke, or, Ili batis unu la alian =
They beat one another. Ili ĵetis terbulojn al la kapo unu de la
alia = They threw clods (lumps of earth) at one another’s heads.
167. CONJUGATION OF ESTI.
The following are the simple tenses and moods of esti, by the aid
of which all the compound tenses in the active voice and all the
tenses in the passive voice of every verb in Esperanto are formed.
The compound tenses of esti, such as mi estas estanta = I am
being, etc., are very rarely used.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Esti = to be.
PARTICIPLES.
| Present, | Estanta | = being. |
| Past, | Estinta | = been, or, having been. |
| Future, | Estonta | = about to be, or, going to be. |
Note that participles take the plural J and accusative N if
required (see par. 207); also the adverbial E (see par. 209 (c)).
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
| Mi | estas | = I am. |
| Vi, ci | estas | = You (thou) are (art). |
| Li, ŝi, ĝi, oni | estas | = He, she, it, one is. |
| Ni | estas | = We are. |
| Vi | estas | = You are. |
| Ili | estas | = They are. |
N.B.—The pronoun ci = thou is rarely used.
Past.
| Mi | estis | = I was. |
| Vi | estis | = You were. |
| Li, etc. | estis | = He was. |
| Ni | estis | = We were. |
| Vi | estis | = You were. |
| Ili | estis | = They were. |
Future.
| Singular. | Mi | estos | = I shall be. |
| Vi | estos | = You will be. |
| Li, etc. | estos | = He will be. |
| Plural. | Ni | estos | = We shall be. |
| Vi | estos | = You will be. |
| Ili | estos | = They will be. |
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
The Conditional or US mood has no tenses (see par. 192). We can
show its meaning best by using the conjunction se, which frequently
introduces it. It has no time value in itself, and may relate to the
past, present, or future.
| Sing. | (Se) | Mi | estus | = (If) I should be, were, had been. |
| (Se) | Vi | estus | = (If) you would, were, had been. |
| (Se) | Li, etc. | estus | = (If) he would, were, had been. |
| Plural. | (Se) | Ni | estus | = (If) we would, were, had been. |
| (Se) | Vi | estus | = (If) you would, were, had been. |
| (Se) | Ili | estus | = (If) they would, were, had been. |
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
The imperative or U mood has no tenses.
The following is its form and meaning in a chief proposition (see
par. 199).
| Singular. | Mi estu | = Let me be. |
| Estu | = Be, or, be you, or, be thou. |
| Li, ŝi, ĝi, estu | = Let him, her, it be. |
| Plural. | Ni estu | = Let us be. |
| Estu | = Be, or, be you, or, be ye. |
| Ili estu | = Let them be. |
The following is its meaning in a dependent proposition, which is
usually introduced by the conjunction ke = that (par. 200).
| Sing. | (Ke) | Mi | estu | = (That) I |
(may, might, should) be. |
| (Ke) | Vi | estu | = (That) you |
| (Ke) | Li, etc. | estu | = (That) he |
| Plural. | (Ke) | Ni | estu | = (That) we |
| (Ke) | Vi | estu | = (That) you |
| (Ke) | Ili | estu | = (That) they |
168. CONJUGATION OF AN ACTIVE VERB.
The conjugation of the compound forms is given in par. 169. When
simple forms sufficiently convey the meaning, they are preferable to
the compound forms.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
| Simple | Present, | Teni | = To hold. |
| Compound | Present, | Esti tenanta | = To be holding. |
| Compound | Past, | Esti teninta | = To have held. |
| Compound | Future, | Esti tenonta | = To be about (or, going) to hold. |
PARTICIPLES.
| Present, | Tenanta | = Holding. |
| Past, | Teninta | = Having held. |
| Future, | Tenonta | = About (or, going) to hold. |
Present (Simple).
| Sing. | Mi | tenas | = I hold, am holding, do hold. |
| Vi (or, ci) | tenas | = You hold, are holding, do hold. |
| Li, ŝi, ĝi | tenas | = He, she, it holds, is holding, does hold. |
| Plural. | Ni | tenas | = We hold, are holding, do hold. |
| Vi | tenas | = You (or, ye) hold, are holding, do hold. |
| Ili | tenas | = They hold, are holding, do hold. |
N.B.—Ci = thou is rarely used. Vi = you is used, as in
English, for both singular and plural; but when vi is plural, the
participle in compound tenses takes the plural J.
Past (Simple).
Mi, vi, etc., tenis = I, you, etc., held, have (or,
had) held, was holding, did hold.
Future (Simple).
Mi, vi, etc., tenos = I, you, etc., shall hold, or,
shall be holding.
The translation of this mood into English depends upon the context,
viz., whether we use the auxiliaries "should," "would," "were,"
"had," or simply the English past tense. It is frequently introduced
by the conjunction se = if (see pars. 190–194).
(Se) mi tenus = (If) I held, or, should hold, or, should
be holding, or, were holding, or, were to hold, or, had held.
IMPERATIVE MOOD (OR "U" MOOD).
| Singular. | Mi tenu | = Let me hold. |
| Tenu | = Hold. |
| Li, ŝi, ĝi, tenu | = Let him, her, it hold. |
| Plural. | Ni tenu | = Let us hold. |
| Tenu | = Hold. |
| Ili tenu | = Let them hold. |
| Sing. | (Ke) mi tenu
| = (That) I |
may, might, should hold. |
| (Ke) vi (or, ci)
tenu | = (That) you (or, thou) |
| (Ke) li tenu | = (That) he |
| Plural. | (Ke) ni tenu | = (That) we |
| (Ke) vi tenu | = (That) you (or, ye) |
| (Ke) ili tenu | = (That) they |
(See remarks on the Imperative mood, pars. 195–202).
CONJUGATION OF THE COMPOUND FORMS OF ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
169. The following shows the compound tenses in the active and
passive voices, and the compound forms of the conditional and
imperative moods:—For the three persons of the plural add J to the
participle (see pars. 173, 174, 235, 236).
| The Present in the | Present |
Mi estas tenanta | = I am holding. |
| Mi estas tenata | = I am (being) held. |
| Past |
Mi estis tenanta | = I was holding. |
| Mi estis tenata | = I was (being) held. |
| Future |
Mi estos tenanta | = I shall be holding. |
| Mi estos tenata | = I shall be (being) held. |
| The Past in the | Present |
Mi estas teninta | = I have held. |
| Mi estas tenita | = I have been, or, was held. |
| Past |
Mi estis teninta | = I had held. |
| Mi estis tenita | = I had been held, or, was held, if
the action is completed. |
| Future |
Mi estos teninta | = I shall have held. |
| Mi estos tenita | = I shall have been held. |
| The Future in the | Present |
Mi estas tenonta | = I am about (or, going) to hold. |
| Mi estas tenota | = I am about (or, going) to be held. |
| Past |
Mi estis tenonta | = I was about (or, going) to hold. |
| Mi estis tenota | = I was about (or, going) to be held. |
| Future |
Mi estos tenonta | = I shall be about to hold. |
| Mi estos tenota | = I shall be about to be held. |
CONDITIONAL, OR "US" MOOD.
Active Voice (Compound Form) and the Passive Voice.
| Se mi estus tenanta | = If I should be, or, were, holding. |
| Se mi estus tenata | = If I should be or, were (being) held, or, if I be held. |
| Se mi estus teninta | = If I should have held, or, if I had held. |
| Se mi estus tenita | = If I should have been held, or, if I had been, or, were, held. |
| Se mi estus tenonta | = If I should be, or, were, about to hold. |
| Se mi estus tenota | = If I should be about to be held. |
N.B.—In the active voice use the simple form instead of the present
and past participle, unless the compound form is necessary to
emphasize the meaning. For instance, in the sentence "He would not
have struck me if you had held him," we use the past participle to
show the anteriority, but we need not use it for the first clause; so
we say:—Li ne frapus min, se vi estus teninta lin. If we use the
simple form, Li ne frapus min, se vi tenus lin, it would be
read:—"He would not strike me if you held him," unless the context
clearly showed the action was completed. We could, however, use the
adverb antaŭe instead of the compound form, and say:—Li ne
frapus min, se vi antaŭe tenus lin = He would not have struck me if
you had held him (lit., if you beforehand held him) (see par. 226 (a)
and remarks on the Conditional mood, pars. 190–194).
IMPERATIVE, OR "U" MOOD.
Active Voice (Compound Form) and the Passive Voice.
| (Por ke) mi estu tenanta | = (In order that) I may be holding. |
| (Por ke) mi estu tenata | = (In order that) I may be held. |
| (Por ke) mi estu teninta | = (In order that) I may have held, or, might hold. |
| (Por ke) mi estu tenita | = (In order that) I may have been held, or, might be held. |
| (Por ke) mi estu tenonta | = (In order that) I may be about to hold. |
| (Por ke) mi estu tenota | = (In order that) I may be about to be held. |
(See remarks on the Imperative mood, pars. 195–202.)
170. CONJUGATION OF A REFLEXIVE VERB.
(INDICATIVE MOOD).
Present (Simple).
| Singular. | Mi lavas min | = I wash myself. |
| Vi lavas vin | = You wash yourself. |
| Li, ŝi, ĝi, lavas sin | = He, she, it washes
himself, herself, itself. |
| Plural. | Ni lavas nin | = We wash ourselves. |
| Vi lavas vin | = You, ye wash yourselves. |
| Ili lavas sin | = They wash themselves. |
Present (Compound), with the Three Participles.
| Ili ne estas lavantaj sin | = They are not washing themselves. |
| Ĉu ni estas lavintaj nin? | = Have we washed ourselves? (lit.,
are we having washed ourselves?) |
| Mi estas lavonta min | = I am about (or, going) to wash
myself. |
Past (Simple).
| Ŝi ne lavis sin | = She did not wash herself. |
| Ĉu ni lavis nin? | = Did we wash ourselves? |
| Ĉu ili ne lavis sin? | = Did they not wash themselves? |
Past (Compound), with the Three Participles.
| Kiam vi estis lavantaj vin? | = When were you washing yourselves? |
| Ni estis lavintaj nin | = We had washed ourselves. |
| Kiam li estis lavonta sin? | = When was he about (or, going) to wash himself? |
Future (Simple).
| Ĉu ni lavos nin? | = Shall we wash ourselves? |
| Li ne lavos sin | = He will not wash himself. |
Future (Compound), with the Three Participles.
| Ŝi estos lavanta sin | = She will be washing herself. |
| Kiam li estos lavinta sin? | = When will he have washed himself? |
| Mi estos lavonta min | = I shall be about (or, going) to
wash myself. |
CONDITIONAL, OR "US" MOOD (Simple Form).
| Se li lavus sin | = If he should wash himself. |
| Ĉu ŝi lavus sin, se...? | = Would she wash herself, if...? |
Conditional (Compound), with the Three Participles.
| Se ni estus lavantaj nin kiam.... | = If we should be washing
ourselves when.... |
| Ĉu ili estus lavintaj sin, se.... | = Would
they have washed themselves if...? |
| Se li estus lavonta sin kiam.... | = If he should be about to wash himself when.... |
IMPERATIVE, OR "U" MOOD (Simple Form).
| Singular. |
Mi lavu min | = Let me wash myself. |
| Mi ne lavu min | = Let me not wash myself. |
| Lavu vin | = Wash yourself. |
| Ne lavu vin | = Do not wash yourself. |
| Li lavu sin | = Let him wash himself. |
| Li ne lavu sin | = Let him not wash himself. |
| Plural. | Ni lavu nin | = Let us wash ourselves. |
| Ni ne lavu nin | = Let us not wash ourselves. |
| Lavu vin | = Wash yourselves. |
| Ne lavu vin | = Do not wash yourselves. |
| Ili lavu sin | = Let them wash themselves. |
| Ili ne lavu sin | = Let them not wash themselves. |
MOODS (Modoj).
171 (a). The moods in Esperanto differ from those in English.
They are three in number, the Conditional, Imperative, and
Infinitive. Dr. Zamenhof makes no mention of any other mood. In
Rule 6 (see par. 94) he mentions only the three
tenses:—Present,
ending in -AS, Past, in -IS, Future, in -OS; the
Conditional (kondiĉa) mood in -US, the Imperative (ordona)
mood in -U, and the Infinitive (sendifina) mood in -I; the
three Active Participles:—Present, -ANT-, Past, -INT-,
Future, -ONT-, and the three Passive Participles:—Present,
-AT-, Past, -IT-, Future, -OT-. These twelve forms serve
amply to represent all the various tenses and moods in English.
However, to make the forms of the verb clearer to the student
accustomed to the use of our indicative mood, we have called the
tenses -AS, -IS, -OS, by that name.
(b). There is no Subjunctive mood, and it is not required. This
mood has been defined as one governed by conjunctions, but since
conjunctions have no bearing on any mood in Esperanto, it is clear
that a mood, under the name of "subjunctive," is not required (see
remarks on ke, par. 198).
The English Subjunctive, in the Present and Perfect, is represented
by the Esperanto Imperative, and in the Pluperfect, Future, and
Future Perfect, by the Esperanto Conditional mood. The auxiliaries
"may" and "might" of the English Subjunctive are often rendered by
the aid of such verbs as permesi, povi, or some word expressing
possibility, as eble (see par. 237 (m)).
172. The mood to be used in Esperanto is determined solely by the
meaning the speaker wishes to convey, and as Esperanto is a purely
logical language, we must be careful not to pedantically copy our
own, but to use the logical mood and tense required by the ideas we
wish to convey. If, therefore, we translate English literally into
Esperanto, we may, in some points, be misunderstood by a foreigner,
although our translation might be perfectly clear to an Englishman.
For instance, our
verbs in the present and past tenses of the
Indicative and Subjunctive moods have the same inflection in the
first person singular and in the three persons of the plural. In
Esperanto there is no such ambiguity. In such a phrase as "If they
were rich, they would be happy," we must be careful to use the proper
mood. Both the first and second propositions are conditional or
suppositive, therefore in Esperanto the Conditional mood is logically
employed, as:—Se ili estus riĉaj, ili estus feliĉaj = If they
were rich, they would be happy. There is nothing of the past in the
first proposition; the idea to be conveyed is of something that has
not occurred, but which might occur.
THE INFINITIVE MOOD (Sendifina Modo).
173. The Infinitive mood in the active voice is formed by adding
-I to the root of the verb for the simple tense, and by the
auxiliary verb esti = to be with one of the active participles
-ANTA, -INTA, -ONTA of the verb for the compound tenses, as:—
| Present (simple), Skribi | = To write. |
| Present (compound), Esti skribanta | = To be writing
(lit., to be being-writing). |
| Past (compound), Esti skribinta | = To have written
(lit., to be having-written). |
| Future (compound), Esti skribonta | = To be about
to write (lit., to be being-about-to-write). |
174. The passive voice is formed by the verb esti and one of the
passive participles, -ATA, -ITA, -OTA.
Present, Esti skribata = To be written (lit., to be
being-written).
Past, Esti skribita = To have been written (lit., to be
having-been-written).
Future, Esti skribota = To be about to be written.
175. The Infinitive mood expresses the state of action denoted by the
verb.
176. In Esperanto the infinitive is almost always used without a
preposition, whereas in English the preposition "to" nearly always
precedes the verb.
Examples.—Mi volas lerni danci = I wish to learn to dance. Li
devigis min kuri = He compelled me to run. Mi hontas esti laŭdata
de li = I am ashamed to be praised by him. Mi devas peni atingi
tiun rezultaton = I must try to attain that result.
177. The only prepositions that can be used before the infinitive
are:—(a). Por = To, or, in order to. (b). Anstataŭ =
Instead of. (c). Antaŭ ol = Before. (d). Krom =
Except, or, besides.
178. Por is used before the infinitive, when in English for the
word "to" we could substitute the words "in order to" or "for to";
or, in some cases, when we could use "for" or "of" with a participle
instead of the infinitive (par. 259 (24)).
Examples.—La plej bonaj metodoj por ricevi ĝin.... = The best
methods to (in order to) obtain it (or, for, or, of obtaining
it).... Mi havas ion por diri al vi = I have something to (for to)
say to you. Kion vi havas ankoraŭ por skribi? = What have you
still to (for to) write? La tempo por legi = The time to read (for
reading). Tio estas malfacila por kompreni = That is difficult (for
to) understand.
179. Anstataŭ, Antaŭ ol and Krom are used before the
infinitive, when in English we use the participle or a simple tense.
Examples.—Anstataŭ trinki = Instead of drinking. Anstataŭ agi
honeste, li fariĝis ŝtelisto = Instead of acting honestly, he
became a thief. Antaŭ ol manĝi = Before eating. Antaŭ ol
foriri, ili surmetis la ĉapelojn = Before going away (before they
went away), they put on their (the) hats. Ne ekzistas alia bono por
la homo krom manĝi kaj trinki = There is nothing better for a man,
than that he should eat and drink (than eating and drinking) (Pred.
II, 14; III, 12).
180. As in English, the infinitive is used:—
(a). As the subject when the act demonstrated is general.
Examples.—Erari estas home = To err is human. Bone pensi kaj bone
agi sufiĉas por vivi bone kaj feliĉe = To think well and to act
well suffice for living well and happily.
(b). As the complement to explain an idea.
Examples.—Vivi estas agi; kiu ne agas, tiu ne vivas = To live is
to act; he who acts not, lives not. Li ĉesis kuri = He ceased to
run (running, or, from running).
181. The infinitive, used thus as the subject, resembles a noun, but,
of course, never takes the article before it. The qualifying word,
used as its predicate, takes the adverbial -E. The infinitive, when
used as the subject, can always be changed into the noun by
substituting -O or -ADO for -I; the noun then takes the
article, since it is used in a general sense (see 99 (a)).
Examples.—Scii estas utile = To know (or, to have knowledge) is
useful; or, La scio estas utila = Knowledge is useful. Legi estas
agrabla okupo, or, La legado estas agrabla okupo = Reading is an
agreeable occupation.
182. The infinitive, or its noun, is used for the gerund, or a
gerundial phrase in English.
Examples.—Promenadi estas sanige, or, La promenado estas saniga
= Walking is healthy. Instrui infanojn diligentajn (or, La
instruado al infanoj diligentaj) estas agrabla okupo = Teaching
diligent children is an agreeable occupation.
183. Occasionally another mood, a participle, or the suffix -EBLA
is used for our infinitive (par. 275 (c)).
Examples.—Vi bone faris, ke vi venis (or, venante) = You did
well to come (that you came). Diru do al li, ke li al mi respondu =
Tell him, then, to answer me. Estos pli saĝe, se ni ne piediros
domen = It will be wiser not to walk (go on foot) home (lit., if we
shall not walk). Estus malfacile renkontebla sindonemo pli plena, ol
lia = It would be difficult to
meet with more complete devotion than his. Ŝi ŝajnis (esti)
forgesinta, ke ŝi estas maljunulino = She seemed to have forgotten
that she was (is) an old woman.
184. Sometimes the infinitive is used when we use another mood or the
participle.
Examples.—Mi prenos miajn glitilojn kaj iros por gliti = I shall
take my skates and go skating. Mi ĉesos kanti, se vi farados tiom
de bruo = I shall cease singing if you go on making so much noise.
Mi kredis vidi ŝipon = I thought I saw a ship.
185. In the following examples it will be seen that the infinitive
(present or past) is used in Esperanto after a noun, adjective, or
participle, when in English a participial form is usually employed,
as:—
La deziro morti = The desire of dying (to die). La ĝojo esti
venkinta = The joy of having conquered. Tro laca marŝi = Too
tired for walking. Lerta paroli = Clever in speaking. Bona por
manĝi = Good for eating.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
186. As stated in par. 171 (a), the indicative is not an Esperanto
mood, but we use the name in order to explain more clearly to the
English student the present, past, and future tenses of Esperanto
verbs.
The Indicative mood, in the Active Voice, has three terminations,
viz., -AS for the Present, -IS for the Past, and -OS for the
Future simple tenses. For the Compound tenses the auxiliary verb
esti = to be, is used with one of the three Active participles of
the verb, -ANTA, -INTA, -ONTA.
187. The Passive Voice is formed by the auxiliary esti with one
of the Passive participles, -ATA, -ITA, -OTA.
188. By the Indicative mood we express something as actually true,
either affirmatively, or negatively, or interrogatively. It is
therefore the mood of certainty.
Examples.—La patro venas = Father comes, or, is coming. Patrino
venis = Mother came, has come, or, did come. Kiam mia frato
venos, ni foriros = When my brother comes (shall come), we will go
away. Se li estas malsana, mi senkulpigas lin = If he is ill, I
excuse him. Li estis juste rekompencita = He had been justly
rewarded. Oni devas pardoni al li = One must pardon him. Li estis
amata de ĉiuj = He was (being) loved by all. Mi estas vestita du
horojn = I have been dressed for two hours (lit., I am
having-been-dressed two hours).
189. The Indicative is therefore obligatory in Esperanto after
verbs, adjectives, participles, and nouns expressing in a positive
manner what one thinks or feels about an act presented as certain.
Examples.—Mi esperas, ke li venos hodiaŭ = I hope that he will
come to-day. Ŝi ne estas certa, ĉu Petro sukcesis = She is not
sure whether Peter succeeded (or, has succeeded). Mi ne dubas, ke
li venos = I do not doubt that he will come. Mi timas, ke la
respondo alvenos, dum mi estos promenanta = I fear that the answer
will arrive whilst I am (shall be) taking a walk. Mi timas, ke li
venos, kaj eble difektos la ĝardenon = I fear that he will come,
and possibly (perhaps) damage (or, and may damage) the garden. Mi
ne dubas, ke ŝi estos vestita kiam mi alvenos = I do not doubt that
she will be (will have been) dressed when I arrive. Ĉu vi opinias,
ke li estas juste rekompencita? = Do you think that he has been
justly rewarded?
THE CONDITIONAL MOOD (Kondiĉa Modo).
190. In the Active Voice the Conditional mood is formed by adding
-US to the root of the verb for the simple form, and by ESTUS and
one of the participles -ANTA, -INTA, -ONTA for the compound
forms. These compound forms are not often used.
191. In the Passive Voice it is formed by ESTUS and one of the
participles -ATA, -ITA, -OTA.
192. It shows that the matter spoken of is conditional, namely, that
it depends on supposition; that an act had not taken place (past),
and was not taking place (present), but that it might happen or have
happened if something else actually occurred. In English the
pluperfect, future, and future perfect tenses of the Subjunctive mood
represent the Conditional mood in Esperanto.
193. After the conjunction "if," expressing a supposition, both the
chief and dependent propositions are in the Conditional mood in
Esperanto, when the act is conditional.
Examples.—Se li estus riĉa, li havus multajn amikojn = If he were
rich, he would have many friends. Se vi volus, vi estus feliĉa =
If you wished, you would be happy. Se ni estus avertitaj, ni estus
defendintaj vin = If we had been (should have been) warned, we
should have defended you. Se li forirus, li riskus, ke la patrino ne
trovus lin = If he went (should go) away he would risk that his
(the) mother would not find him.
193. (a). Note the various ways in which estus may be translated
with the present and past passive participles in the following two
sentences:—
(1). Se li estus sendata Berlinon, li estus devigata lasi sian
edzinon hejme.
(2). Se li estus sendita Berlinon, li estus devigita lasi sian
edzinon hejme.
(1). If he were (should be) sent to Berlin he would be compelled to
leave his wife at home.
(2). If he had (should have) been sent to Berlin he would have been
compelled to leave his wife at home.
194. As in other languages, the Conditional is used in Esperanto to
attenuate or soften an expression that would be harsh or imperative,
if the verb were in the Indicative; in fact, such attenuation implies
some unexpressed condition.
Example.—Mi volus, ke tiu laboro estu finita hodiaŭ vespere = I
should like that work (to be) finished this evening. Here the
condition might be, "if you possibly can do it" (see par. 202 as to
estu, Imperative mood, for the Infinitive).
THE IMPERATIVE or "U" MOOD (Ordona Modo).
195. In the Active Voice the Imperative (or "U") mood is formed by
adding -U to the root of the verb, or by estu and one of the
participles -ANTA, -INTA, or -ONTA for the compound forms;
but the latter are very rarely used.
196. In the Passive Voice it is formed by estu and one of the
participles, -ATA, -ITA, or -OTA.
197. The "U" mood implies order (ordono), purpose (celo),
entreaty (peto), wish (volo), obligation (devo), fitness
(konveno), necessity (neceso), merit (merito), intention
(intenco), etc. It will be seen that the Esperanto u has a wider
application than what is usually understood by the "Imperative" mood,
for it may indicate not only a direct command or order, but also
desire or expediency of any degree, expressed or understood.
198. The ending u is used not only in a chief but also in a
dependent proposition, and in the latter case it is usually
introduced by the conjunction ke = that; but it must be borne in
mind that conjunctions have no more influence in the Imperative than
they have in other moods (pars. 171, 263), although when ke is
followed by the Imperative we translate the phrase into English
either by some tense of the Subjunctive mood, or, perhaps, more
frequently, by the Infinitive.
199. In a chief proposition it is used to command or entreat, and
when the verb of a chief proposition is in the Imperative, if the
dependent proposition also contains an order of entreaty, its verb
will, naturally, likewise be in the Imperative.
Examples.—Venu tien ĉi = Come here. Donu al mi tiun libron =
Give me that book. Li venu tien ĉi tuj = Let him come here at
once. Ni iru Parizon morgaŭ = Let us go to
Paris to-morrow. Do ne maltrankviligu vin (or, Vi do ne
maltrankviliĝu) pri la afero = Do not then trouble yourself about
the matter. Ordonu, ke li venu = Order him to come (that he come).
Diru al ŝi, ke ŝi foriru = Tell her to go away (that she go
away). Atentu, ke vi ne falu = Take care not to fall (or, lest
you fall). Ni ne toleru, ke li tiamaniere kontraŭstaru al ni = Let
us not suffer him in that way to oppose us (or, Let us not tolerate
that he oppose us in that manner). Ni zorgu, ke li nenion povu
difekti = Let us take care that he can damage nothing. Diru al li,
ke mi deziras, ke li estu silenta = Tell him that I desire him to be
silent (that he be silent). For other examples see par. 237 (m).
200. In a dependent proposition the ending u is also used when
the verb in the chief proposition, although not in the Imperative,
implies order, entreaty, wish, etc., as mentioned in par. 197. And
also after such verbs as, to advise, invite, write, etc., etc., when
the idea to be conveyed is in the nature of an order, wish, etc.
(pars. 58 (a), 237 (m) (3)).
Examples.—Mi ordonis al li, ke li donu al mi la libron = I ordered
him to give me the book. Mi petas, ke vi sendu al mi la hundon = I
beg you to send me the dog. Li ne postulis, ke mi fermu la
fenestron = He did not require me to shut the window. Mi volas, ke
vi skribu al via frato = I wish you to write to your brother. Estas
necese, ke ni tien iru = It is necessary for us to go thither. Vi
meritas, ke oni pendigu vin = You deserve to be hanged (that they
hang you). Mi bezonas, ke li venu = I want him to come (I have need
that he come). Mi ne volis, ke li venu = I did not wish him to come
(that he should come). Ŝi konsilis, ke mi ne sendu la leteron =
She advised me not to send the letter (she advised "do not send the
letter"). Mi lin tien ĉi invitis, ke li klarigu la aferon = I
invited him here to explain (that he might explain) the matter. Ili
skribis, ke mi ne venu hodiaŭ = They wrote to me not to come to-day
(They wrote that I should not come to-day, or, They wrote "do not
come to-day").
201. The expression por ke = in order that, to the end that,
so that, etc., is always followed by the Imperative, because this
expression implies "order."
Examples.—Por ke vi povu pagi tiun ĉi ŝuldon, estas necese, ke vi
kunportu sufiĉe grandan sumon da mono = In
order to be able to pay (in order that you may be able to pay) this
debt it is necessary for you to bring (that you bring) a sufficient
large sum of money. Por ke vi estu elektata, vi bezonas batali kun
ekstrema energio = In order to be elected (that you may be elected),
you need to fight with extreme energy. Por ke oni rekompencu vin,
konvenas, ke vi tion meritu = In order that they may reward you, it
is fitting that you merit it. Mi volas ĉion fari, por ke vi estu
kontenta pri mi = I wish to do everything to satisfy you (so that
you may be satisfied with me). Respondu al mi antaŭ morgaŭ, por ke
mi sciu, kion mi devos diri al li = Answer me before to-morrow, so
that I may know what I must (shall have to) say to him. Mi volas, ke
li estu ordonata atendi mian alvenon = I wish that he may be ordered
to await my arrival, or, I wish him to be ordered to await my
arrival.
201 (a). The compound forms of the Imperative in the active voice
are very rarely used, but they are occasionally useful to give
exactitude to an expression.
Examples.—Mi deziras, ke li estu min atendanta en la stacidomo je
la dua horo morgaŭ posttagmeze = I desire that he be awaiting me in
the station at 2 o’clock to-morrow afternoon. Estas necese, ke li
estu fininta sian laboron, je la tria horo = It is necessary that he
have (for him to have) finished his work at 3 o’clock. Mi ne volas,
ke li estu fininta sian laboron, kiam mi alvenos, sed ke li estu
finonta ĝin = I do not wish that he shall have finished his work
when I (shall) come, but that he be about to finish it.
202. From the examples given of the use of the Imperative mood, we
see that in Esperanto the verb in a dependent proposition is almost
always preceded by the conjunction ke = that, and that the
English rendering generally puts the verb in the Infinitive, the
conjunction being omitted, or if it be retained, that the verb is in
the Subjunctive mood. It is not generally advisable to translate this
infinitive rendering literally into Esperanto, except when the
actor of the first verb is also the actor of the second.
Examples.—Mi volas lin vidi morgaŭ = I wish to see him to-morrow.
La lernejestro deziris rekompenci la knabon = The schoolmaster
desired to reward the boy. Ni bezonos forte labori, se ni deziras
fini la falĉadon hodiaŭ vespere = We shall need to work hard if we
wish to finish the mowing this evening.
THE PARTICIPLES (Participoj).
There are three forms of the participle, viz.:—The adjectival in
-A, the adverbial in -E, and the substantival in -O.
203. In the active voice the adjectival is formed by adding
-ANTA, -INTA, -ONTA to the root of the verb, as:—
- Present, Skribanta = Writing (lit., being writing).
- Past, Skribinta = Having written.
- Future, Skribonta = About (going) to write.
204. In the passive voice by adding -ATA, -ITA, -OTA, as:—
- Present, Skribata = Being written.
- Past, Skribita = Written, or, having been written.
- Future, Skribota = About (or, going) to be written.
205. The active participles, preceded by the auxiliary verb esti
= to be, in its various moods and tenses, form the compound
tenses of the active voice.
206. The passive participles, with the verb esti, form all the
moods and tenses in the passive voice.
207. Participles, like adjectives, agree in number and case with
the nouns or pronouns to which they refer.
Examples. Ni estas vidintaj la viron = We have seen the man. Ŝi
vidis la virojn legantajn = She saw the men who were reading (the
reading men). Ni vidas la krimojn elfaratajn ĉiutage sur la
stratoj = We see the crimes being perpetrated daily in the streets.
208. All the participles can be used as adjectives and also as
nouns and adverbs, by substituting -O for -A for a noun, and -E
for -A for an adverb. The words still retain the signification of
the tense of the participle. Participial adjectives and adverbs in
the active voice govern the accusative.
209. Examples in the active voice.
(a). Participial nouns, as:—La leganto = The reader (person
now reading). La leginto = The reader (person who has been
reading). La legonto = The reader (person about to read).
Examples.—La leganto havas bonan voĉon, sed la leginto havis pli
bonan; mi kredas, tamen, ke la legonto havos la plej bonan voĉon el
ĉiuj = The (present) reader has a good voice, but the (previous)
reader had a better; I believe, however, that the (coming) reader
will have the best voice of all. Ĉi tiu (or, tiu ĉi) ideo
okupis la grandan pensanton ĝis la fino de lia vivo = This idea
occupied the great thinker up to the end of his life.
(b). Participial adjectives agree with their nouns in number and
case, but when predicative they agree in number only (see remarks
on adjectives, pars. 36, 108, 110, also par. 87 (d)).
Examples.—La mortanta viro vidis mortintan virinon sur la apuda
lito = The dying man saw a dead woman in the next bed. Ŝi paliĝis
kaj aspektis kiel virino mortonta = She grew pale and appeared like
a woman about to die. In the above sentences participial nouns might
be used when the translation in English would be word for word the
same, as:—La mortanto vidis mortintinon sur la apuda lito. Ŝi
paliĝis, kaj aspektis kiel mortontino. This shows the wonderful
flexibility of Esperanto!
(c). Participial adverbs are invariable.
Examples.—Legante ni lernas = In reading we learn. Fininte sian
laboron, li iris hejmen = Having finished his work, he went home.
Aĉetonte libron, li petas, ke mi pruntu al li tri ŝilingojn =
Being about to buy a book, he begs me to lend him (that I lend him)
three shillings.
210. Examples in the passive voice.
(a). Participial nouns, as:—La aludato = The person being
spoken of, or, the person in question. La aludito = The
aforesaid (person). La aludoto = The person about to be spoken
of.
Examples.—La pendigotino nun aperis sur la eŝafodo = The woman
about to be hanged now appeared on the scaffold. La batito tute
meritis la punon, kiun la batinto donis al li = The beaten one quite
deserved the punishment that the beater gave him.
(b). Participial adjectives and adverbs. La konstruata domo =
The house under construction. La konstruita domo = The
(actually) constructed house. La konstruota domo = The house
(about) to be constructed. Konstruota does not show obligation to
construct, but simply that it is intended to build the house, and
that it will be eventually built.
Examples.—Li venis al mi tute ne atendite = He came to me quite
unexpectedly. Ne estas atendate ke li venos = It is not expected
(being expected) that he will come. La domo estas vendota morgaŭ =
The house is to be sold to-morrow.
N.B.—Note that when the subject is not expressed, the participle
takes the adverbial form (see par. 245).
211. Relation of the participle to the subject.
(a). When a participle, relating to the subject of a sentence, but
not qualifying it, expresses the circumstances, manner, time,
occasion, etc., of an act, it takes the adverbial form. Zamenhof
states that the "ablative absolute" does not exist in Esperanto, as
its use would be against the spirit of the language.
Examples.—Promenante sur la strato, mi falis = (While) walking in
the street, I fell. Trovinte pomon, mi ĝin manĝis = Having found
an apple, I ate it (see par. 245 (a)).
(b). If, however, the participle does not relate to the subject
of the sentence, we must either change the construction so as to make
the participial
portion of the sentence relate to the subject, or
else use another mood with a conjunction, adverb, etc.
For instance, we might say in English, "The enemy having run away, we
crossed the bridge," but we cannot translate this literally into
Esperanto, because "having run away" does not relate to those who
crossed the bridge; therefore it would be wrong to say La malamiko
forkurinte, ni transiris la ponton. So we must change the
construction, thus:—"Having put to flight (made to run away) the
enemy, we crossed the bridge" = Forkuriginte la malamikon, ni
transiris la ponton. Or, another construction would be:—"After the
enemy ran away, we crossed the bridge" = Post kiam la malamiko
forkuris, ni transiris la ponton. In the sentence, "Swimming in the
lake, the man saw a large swan," it is not clear whether the man or
the swan was swimming, but in Esperanto there is no ambiguity. In the
sentence, Naĝante sur la lago, la homo vidis grandan cignon, the
participle, naĝante, relates to the man, the subject of vidis.
If we wish it to relate to the swan, we make it agree with cignon,
and say, Naĝantan sur la lago, etc. But it would be better to
alter the order, thus: La homo vidis grandan cignon naĝantan (kiu
naĝis) sur la lago.
212. Participial expressions with prepositions.
(a). Without can be rendered by the negative ne and an
adverbial participle, or by sen followed by a noun.
Examples.—Li alvenis, ne avertinte min (or, sen averto al mi) =
He arrived without (not) having warned me. Mi ne povos tion ĉi
fari, ne estante subtenata (or, ne subtenate, or, sen subteno) =
I shall not be able to do this without being supported. Ni iru al la
danĝero, ne timante la morton (or, sen timo pri la morto) = Let
us go to the danger without fearing death.
(b). For can be rendered by ke = that (or, pro tio, ke or,
tial, ke) and the indicative.
Examples.—Mi estas al vi danka, ke vi avertis min = I am thankful
to you for having (that you) warned me. Pardonu al mi, ke mi tiel
faras = Pardon me for so doing. Pardonu al mi pro tio, ke mi tiel
faris = Pardon me for having done so (that I so did).
(c). Of, by por and the infinitive.
Example.—Mi pripensis pri rimedo por deturni lin de lia projekto =
I reflected on a means of turning him from his project.
(d). After, by an adverbial past participle.
Example.—"Kion ni faros?" li diris, sidinte momenton silente =
"What shall we do?" he said, after sitting (having sat) for a moment
in silence.
(e). Before, by antaŭ ol and the infinitive.
Example.—Li ludis antaŭ ol labori = He played before working.
213. The participle for the adjective.
(a). Be careful not to use the participle terminations -ANTA,
-INTA for simple adjectives that have a form of their own. Some
English words ending in "ing" and "ed" may be used either as
participles or as simple adjectives. Note that the participle denotes
action, whilst the adjective denotes quality, state, etc.
(b). Such words have, in Esperanto, an adjectival as well as a
participial form, and we must be careful to use the right one in
accordance with the sense.
Examples..—Laboranta and labora = Working. Ĉarmanta and
ĉarma = Charming. Interesanta and interesa = Interesting.
Sufokanta and sufoka = Suffocating. Kontentigita and kontenta
= Satisfied; pleased, content.
(c). Observe the difference in meaning of the following:—
Rigardu tiun homon, laborantan (kiu laboras) sur la kampo! = Look
at that man, working in the field! Rigardu tiun homon laboran
(better, tiun laboriston) sur la kampo! = Look at that
working-man in the field! In the first sentence, laborantan, the
participle, denotes the action of the man: in the second, laboran,
the adjective, denotes his state, condition, etc. Ŝi estas
ĉarmanta nin per sia
kantado = She is charming us with her singing. Ŝi estas ĉarma,
kiam ŝi kantas = She is charming when she sings. It would be
better, instead of using the participle ĉarmanta, to say, Ŝi
ĉarmas nin per sia kantado. Mi ne estas kontentigita per liaj
respondoj = I have not been satisfied with his replies. Mi ne estas
kontenta je li = I am not pleased with him.
THE TENSES (La Tempoj).
The Tenses, Active Voice.
214. The Tenses indicate the time of action, and its state of
completeness or incompleteness. They are either simple or compound.
The simple tenses are formed by adding -AS, -IS or -OS to the
root of the verb, and the terminations remain the same for all
persons and numbers. The compound tenses are formed by the auxiliary
verb esti = to be, and one of the participles of the verb which
must agree in number with its subject. Esti is conjugated in
exactly the same way as all other verbs.
215. The three Tenses used in Esperanto are the Present, Past, and
Future.
216. Duration of action of the verb.—(a). In English, to express
the continuance of an action, the present participle of a transitive
verb is used after the verb "to be" in all the moods and tenses—as
"I am loving," or "I was (have been, shall be, should be) loving";
imperative, "Be thou loving." If great exactness as regards time be
necessary, these forms can be represented in Esperanto word for word
as they are in English, viz., by the compound forms, mi estas
(estis, estos, estus) amanta, estu amanta.
(a). To show that an action is continuous or habitual, the suffix
-AD- may be added to the verb (see remarks on suffix -AD-, par.
270 (1)).
Examples.—Ŝi kantadas la tutan tagon = She keeps on singing the
whole day. La birdoj flugadis de arbo al arbo = The birds were
(kept on) flying from tree to tree.
(b). The commencement of an action, or a sudden action, is shown by
adding the prefix EK-.
Examples.—Ŝi ekkantis = She began to sing. La lumo brilis = The
light shone. La lumo ekbrilis = The light flashed (see remarks on
prefix EK-, par. 288).
217. Emphatic form of verb.—In English this form consists of the
verb, preceded by "do" or "did," and is confined to the present and
past tenses of the indicative and subjunctive moods, and the
imperative mood of the active voice, as:—"I do love," "He does
love," "I did love," "Do love." This form in Esperanto can be
represented by the adverb ja = indeed, or by suitable adverbs,
such as tre, tre multe, vere, certe, efektive, etc.
Examples.—Mi ja lin amas = I do love him. Mi tiel multe amis
ŝin = I did so love her.
The Present.
218. The Present tense (simple) ends in -AS. It is used to
express not only what is happening at the moment, but also what
happens in all time, or what is understood to be present.
Examples.—Mi kuras = I run, or am running. La vero ĉiam
venkas = Truth always conquers. La aŭtoro diras en sia verko, ke
.... = The author says in his book that.... Kiun vi vidas? = Whom do
you see? Mi vidas neniun = I see nobody. Mi foriras, ĉar mia
patro min atendas = I am going away, for my father awaits (or
expects) me. Mi ĉiam leviĝas tre frue = I always get up (rise)
very early. Nenion oni faras sen peno = One does nothing without
effort.
219. The Present in place of the Past or Future.—In Esperanto, as
in other languages, the Present is often used for the Past or Future,
to give vividness to an expression.
Examples.—Mi haltas, perdante la spiron, kiam subite mi aŭdas post
mi voĉon = I stop, losing breath, when suddenly I hear behind me a
voice. Hodiaŭ plenaj de vivo, ni estas morgaŭ la akiro de la
tombo = To-day full of life, to-morrow we shall be (are) the prey
(acquirement) of the tomb.
220. Esperanto logically always employs the Present, even in a phrase
relating to what has past, if the action is present relatively to the
time in question.
Example.—Ĉiuj, kiuj ŝin vidis povis pensi, ke ili vidas la
patrinon = All who saw her could think that they saw (see) her (the)
mother. In this sentence, what did they think? Their thought was, "We
see her mother," not "We saw her mother." The sight was present to
them, hence ili vidas.
221. Present in place of the Past.—If it is a question of the
truth of all time, or of a fact existing at the moment spoken of,
English generally uses the Past tense, but in Esperanto the Present
is always employed.
Examples.—Ni eksciis, ke vi estas en Londono ok tagojn = We learnt
that you were (are) in London for eight days. Ni kredis, ke vi estas
kuracisto = We believed that you were (are) a doctor. Li instruis
nin, he ĉiam oni devas esti indulga = He taught us that one must
always be forbearing (merciful).
222. The Present tense (compound) is formed by the auxiliary
esti = to be and one of the three participles, -ANTA, -INTA,
-ONTA. The compound tenses are seldom used in Esperanto, and their
use is to be avoided if the simple tenses suffice to convey our
meaning. Their use, therefore, is confined to giving exactitude to
the time of an action or to an idea (see par. 169).
Examples.—Li estas vojaĝanta = He is travelling. The simple form,
Li vojaĝas, might mean that he travels generally, but possibly is
not at this moment on his way to any place. If, therefore, we wish to
convey that he is actually on his way to some place, we use the
compound form, or some additional word, as nun, e.g., li nun
vojaĝas. Kiam la abeloj estas forflugontaj, ili zumadas laŭte =
When bees are about to fly away, they (are accustomed to) hum loudly
(see par. 216 (a)). Esti skribanta = To be writing.
The Past.
223. The Past tense (simple) ends in -IS. It expresses
something that has passed. It is used for the three tenses in
English; the past, imperfect, and perfect; and sometimes for the
pluperfect, if its use does not cause ambiguity.
Examples.—Mi skribis = I wrote, I was writing, or, I have
written. Li venis antaŭ du horoj = He came two hours ago. Pluvis
hieraŭ = It rained yesterday. Se li estis malsana, li ne povis
veni = If he was ill, he could not come. Ĉu vi lin vidis? = Did
you see (or, have you seen) him? Li foriris, antaŭ ol mi alvenis
= He had left before I arrived. Mi promenis hieraŭ, kaj renkontis
vian amikon = I took a walk (or, I was walking, better
promenadis) yesterday, and met your friend.
224. The Past tense (compound) is formed by the auxiliary verb
esti = to be and one of the three participles, -ANTA, -INTA,
-ONTA. This form should not be used when the simple form suffices
to convey the required meaning. It is better employed only when we
wish to give to an expression more exactitude as regards the state of
the subject at the time of the principal action than is conveyed by
the simple form (see pars. 169, 226 (a)).
Examples.—Kiam li estis fininta sian laboron, li iris hejmen =
When he had finished his work, he went home. Mi estis skribanta
leteron, kiam okazis tertremo = I was writing a letter when an
earthquake took place. Ili interkonsentis kaj estis enirontaj la
landon, sed io okazis, kio ilin malhelpis = They mutually agreed,
and were about to enter the country, but something happened which
prevented them.
225. To show that something has just happened, or is very soon going
to happen, the words ĵus = just, or tuj = immediately, are
often used respectively.
Examples.—Mi ĵus vidis tre belan pentraĵon = I have just seen a
very beautiful picture. Ni estis tuj elirontaj, kiam ekpluvis = We
were on the point of (or, just) going out when it began to rain.
226. The past tense of esti (estis) and the past participle
(-INTA) of the verb correspond with the pluperfect in English. It
denotes an action that was completed at a time now past. As before
stated, it need not be employed when the simple past tense in -IS
sufficiently expresses the meaning wished to be conveyed.
Examples.—Kiam ŝi estis rakontinta ĉion, kio okazis, ŝi
ekploris = When she had related everything that happened, she began
to weep. Here, in English, we should probably say "everything that
had happened," but "ĉion, kio estis okazinta" is unnecessary in
Esperanto, as the meaning is quite clear with "okazis." Li ne
estis parolinta du sekundojn, kiam mi diris al li "Silentu!" = He
had not spoken for two seconds when I said to him, "Be silent!"
226 (a). The adverb antaŭe = beforehand (or jam, or jam
antaŭe) is sometimes used with the past and future simple tenses,
or with the simple forms of the Conditional or Imperative mood,
instead of the compound tenses or forms (see Part III, Exercise 8).
Examples.—Kiam vi eniris en la ĉambron, la gastoj jam antaŭe
foriris (or, estis foririntaj) = When you entered the room, the
guests had departed (lit., already beforehand departed). Kiam vi
venos al mi, mi jam antaŭe finos (or, estos fininta) la laboron
= When you have (will) come to me, I shall have finished the work.
Li ne aĉetus la libron, se vi antaŭe ne donus (or, estus
doninta) al li la monon = He would not have bought the book unless
you had given him the money (lit., if you beforehand should not give
him the money).
The Future.
227. The Future (simple) ends in -OS. The future (compound) is
formed by the auxiliary esti
and one of the three participles,
-ANTA, -INTA, -ONTA, but the compound form should be used only
when we wish to express anteriority, that is to say, action taking
place previous to that of the principal action.
228. The future denotes an action yet to take place.
Examples.—La patro venos post du tagoj = Father will come in two
days. Ĉu vi pruntos al mi la libron? = Will you lend me the book?
Kiam li alvenos? = When will he arrive? Li venos la lundon
proksiman = He will come next Monday.
229. If we wish to mark a near future, we can use with the verb the
adverbs tuj = immediately, baldaŭ = soon, tre baldaŭ =
very soon.
Examples.—Li tuj alvenos = He will arrive immediately. Li tre
baldaŭ estos tie ĉi = He will very soon be here.
230. The future compound with the present participle is used when
we wish to mark that an action will be going on at some particular
time in the future.
Example.—Je la deka morgaŭ matene mi estos veturanta Parizon = At
10 o’clock to-morrow morning I shall be travelling to Paris.
231. The future compound with the past participle is used when we
wish to mark that an action will be finished at some particular
time in the future (see par. 226 (a)).
Example.—Mi estos fininta mian laboron je la sesa horo morgaŭ
vespere = I shall have finished my work at six o’clock to-morrow
evening.
232. The future for the present indicative or subjunctive.—Be
careful not to imitate English in using the present or subjunctive
for the future.
Examples.—Se pluvos, li ne venos = If it rains, he will not come.
Kion vi faros, kiam mi estos en la tombo? = What will you do when I
am in the grave? Mi skribos la leteron dum vi ripozos = I shall
write the letter whilst you are
resting. Ŝi skribis al ni, ke ŝi estos tie ĉi morgaŭ = She
wrote to us that she would (will) be here to-morrow (she wrote what?
not "that she would," but "that she will," so the future is the
correct tense).
The Tenses, Passive Voice.
233. The tenses of the passive voice are formed by the simple tenses
of the auxiliary verb esti and the passive participles, -ATA,
-ITA, -OTA. All the tenses are therefore compound. As with the
active participles, J is added to the three persons of the plural
in all the tenses.
234. The signification of the tenses is the same as in the active
voice, except, of course, that the subject of a passive verb is acted
upon. Since esti is the only auxiliary verb used in Esperanto, it
represents the two English auxiliaries, "to be" and "to have"; we
must, therefore, translate it accordingly.
235. Care must be taken in the use of these participles. For
instance, the participles of skribi = to write used alone mean—
Present, Skribata = Written, or, being written (action going
on).
Past, Skribita = Written, or, been written (lit., having been
written) (action completed).
Future, Skribota = About to be, or, going to be, written
(action about to occur).
236. The various tenses of the verb esti show the time of the
action, and the three participles the state of the subject at that
time. Note carefully the various shades of meaning in the following
examples:—
La pordego estas fermata, ĉar la ludo estas ludota = The gate is
being shut, for the game is about to be played.
La pordego estas fermita, ĉar la ludo estas ludata = The gate is
(or, has been) shut, for the game is being played.
La pordego estis fermita, dum la ludo estis ludata = The gate was
(or, had been) shut whilst the game was being played.
Kiam estos pendigata la homo? = When will the man be (being)
hanged?
Li estis pendigota morgaŭ, sed oni diras, ke li ne estos pendigata
ĝis mardo = He was to have been (was about to be) hanged to-morrow,
but they say he will not be hanged till Tuesday.
Kaj kiam li estos pendigita, kie li estos enterigota? = And when he
is (has been) hanged, where is he to be buried? (lit., and when he
shall have been hanged, where will he be about to be buried?). Note
that after the interrogative kiam the English present tense is
often future in Esperanto, as:—Kiam li venos? When is he coming?
or, When will he come?
Pasero estis kaptita kaj enmetita en kaĝon, sed kiam la pordeto de
la kaĝo estis malfermata, ĝi forflugis = A sparrow was (or, had
been) caught and put into a cage, but when the door of the cage was
being opened it flew away.
N.B.—In the above sentence we see that the sparrow was (estis)
first in the state of having been caught (kaptita); then in the
state of having been put (enmetita) into a cage; then that the door
was in the state of being opened (malfermata), and that during this
action the bird flew away (forflugis).
(For examples of the passive conditional mood see par. 193.)
(For examples of the rare use of the passive imperative mood see par. 201.)
Devi.
237 (a). Devi = to be obliged to, to have to, means to be
physically or morally obliged to do something, as:—Vi devas fari
tion = You must (have to, are to) do that. Vi ne devas fari tion
= You are not obliged to do that. If, however, the action is not
immediate, the future tense is used for "must," as:—Vi devos fari
tion morgaŭ = You must (will have to) do that to-morrow. In its
Conditional form devi may be used, like other verbs, to soften an
expression, and then it can be translated by "ought," as:—Vi devus
ne fari tion = You ought not to (should not) do that. Here devus
is used instead of the more peremptory form, devas; Vi devas ne fari
tion would mean You must not (are not to) do that (see par. 194,
also pars. 237 (o), (p), on "should," "must," "ought," and par.
59 (a)).
Examples.—Mi devas vin forlasi, ĉar oni atendas min = I must
(have to) leave you, for they are waiting for me. Ĉu mi devas fari
tion tuj? = Must I (am I to) do that at once? Ĉu mi devos veni
morgaŭ = Must I (shall I have to, am I to) come to-morrow? Mi
devis skribi leteron = I had (have had) to write a letter. Li devis
min vidi hodiaŭ, sed li ne povas veni = He was to see me to-day,
but he cannot come. Ili devis vidi min hieraŭ, sed ili ne povis
veni = They were to have seen me yesterday, but they could not come.
Li estis kolera hieraŭ, ĉar li devis iri lernejon = He was angry
yesterday, because he was obliged to (had to) go to school. Sed por
tio ĉi mi devos atendi iom da tempo = But for this I shall have to
(I must) wait some time. Se mi lin vidus, mi devus paroli kun li =
If I saw him, I should have to speak to him. Se mi lin vidus, mi
estus devinta paroli kun li = If I had seen (saw) him, I should have
been obliged (have had) to speak to him. La celo de ĉiu estas, aŭ
devus esti, bonfaradi = The aim of everyone is, or ought to (should)
be, to do good. Li devus kolekti kaj aranĝi siajn faktojn = He
ought to (should) collect and arrange his facts. Kiam vi estas tie,
vi devus vidi la kastelon = When you are there, you ought to see the
castle. Kiam vi estis tie, vi devus vidi (or, vi devus esti
vidinta) la kastelon = When you were there, you ought to have seen
the castle. Mi devus tute ne aŭskulti ŝin = I ought not to listen
to her at all.
From these examples we see that the following is the meaning of
devi in its moods and tenses. The compound forms should not be used
unless absolutely necessary to render the meaning clear.
Present.
- Vi devas (paroli) = You must, have to, are to (speak).
Past.
- Mi devis (paroli) = I had to (speak); or, I was to (speak, or,
have spoken).
- Mi estas devinta (paroli) = I have been obliged, or, I have had
to (speak).
- Mi estis devinta (paroli) = I had been obliged to (speak).
Future.
- Mi devos (paroli) = I shall have to, I am to, I must (speak).
Conditional.
- Mi devus (paroli), se ... = I should have to, or, be obliged to
(speak), if ...
- Mi estus devinta (paroli), se ... = I should have had to, or,
have been obliged to (speak), if ...
Conditional (softened sense).
- Vi devus (paroli) = You ought to, or, you should (speak, or, have
spoken).
- Vi devus (esti parolinta) = You ought to have, or, you should have
(spoken).
N.B.—Do not use devi for "were to," when no obligation is implied.
Note the difference in meaning in the following sentences:—Se ili
venus, mi vidus ilin = If (supposing) they were to come (if they
came), I would see them. Ili devis veni la lastan semajnon, sed io
malhelpis ilin = They were to (have) come last week, but something
prevented them.
Also do not use devi for "am to," "was to," etc., when these words
express not "obligation," but "purpose" or "intention." For
instance, "Are you to speak at the meeting?" may mean either (1) "Do
you intend to (Shall you) speak?" or, (2) "Have you to (Must you)
speak?" So we translate (1) Ĉu vi intencas paroli (Ĉu vi parolos)
ĉe la kunveno? or, (2) Ĉu vi devos paroli ĉe la kunveno? In
such a phrase as "You are to do that" the obligation is clear, so we
say Vi devas tion fari.
Further, do not use devi in translating such a sentence as "The man
must be a fool," which is La viro sendube estas malsaĝulo, not,
devas esti ...
Kuŝi.
237 (b). Kuŝi = to lie, to be situated, is sometimes used to
denote anything in a state of rest, or in a recumbent position. It
has, therefore, also the meaning of "to be."
Examples.—La krajono kuŝas sur la libro = The pencil lies (is) on
the book. La libroj kuŝas sur la breto = The books are (lie) on
the shelf.
Koni and Scii.
237 (c). Koni and scii are used in the same sense as the French
verbs connaître and savoir.
Koni means to know, to be acquainted with, to know a person,
or, thing.
Examples.—Mi konas vian fraton = I know your brother. Li konas la
hundon, sed li ne konas ĝian posedanton = He knows the dog, but he
does not know its owner.
N.B.—It is never followed by the conjunction KE; Mi konas, ke,
is wrong. Mi scias, ke vi ... = I know that you ...
Scii means to know, to be aware of, to know something is or
was happening, etc.
N.B.—It is never used of persons.
Examples.—Mi scias, ke li estas prava = I know that he is right.
Mi sciis, ke li estis tie hieraŭ = I knew he was there yesterday.
Mi ne sciis, ke vi konas lin = I did not know that you knew him.
Mi konas la francan lingvon, sed mi ne scias ĝin = I know
(recognize) the French language (when I see it), but I do not know
it.
Lasi.
237 (d). Lasi, like the English verb "to leave," has various
meanings.
(1). To let remain, as:—Li lasis la libron sur la tablo = He left
the book on the table.
(2). To leave in a place, not to take with one, as:—Li lasis sian
edzinon en la domo = He left his wife in the house. Lasu vian
bastonon tie ĉi = Leave your stick here.
(3). To lose restraint upon something, as:—Li lasis fali la libron
= He let the book fall.
(4). To leave in a certain state, as:—Li lasis min en la plej
granda embaraso = He left me in the greatest embarrassment. Li
lasis la domon tre malpura = He left the house very dirty.
(5). To leave to the care of someone, as:—La juĝisto lasis la
infanojn al la patro = The judge left the children to the father.
(6). To have remaining at death, to leave behind one, as:—Kiam li
mortis, li lasis (or, postlasis) grandan riĉaĵon, kiun li
testamentis al diversaj bonfaraj institucioj = When
he died, he left great wealth, which he left to various charitable
institutions (note that to "leave," "bequeath," is testamenti).
(7). Lasi, followed by the preposition en, means to "leave in,"
or to "let into," according as the complement is in the nominative or
accusative, e.g.:—Mi lasis la hundon en la domo = I left the dog
in the house. Mi lasis la hundon en la domon = I let the dog into
the house.
(8). In the "Krestomatio," page 25, it is used in the sense to "leave
off," "cease," as:—Aleksandro lasis sian paroladon pri batalo kaj
petis de ili panon = Alexander left off talking of battle, and asked
them for bread.
(9). Lasi, followed by an infinitive, means to "let," or, "allow,"
as:—Lasu al mi ĝin fari = Let me do it, or, Leave it to me to
do. Sometimes we find it used in the sense "allow to be," as:—Neniu
volis lasi rimarki, ke li nenion vidas = No one wished to let it be
noticed that he saw (sees) nothing. This imitates the idiom of some
national languages. It can be explained as an omission of onin or
some other pronoun, thus:—Neniu volis lasi onin (nin) rimarki,
ke ... = No one wished to let people (us) notice that ...
(10). Allasi = to admit (own the truth), as:—Li allasis, ke li
estas malprava = He admitted he was (is) wrong.
(11). Delasi = to allow to leave, as:—Li delasis lin de la domo
= He let him leave the house.
(12). Enlasi (like lasi en) = to let go in, as:—Enlasu min! =
Let me in!
(13). Forlasi = to abandon, as:—Li forlasis sian postenon = He
abandoned his post.
(14). Preterlasi = to let pass, as:—Li preterlasis la okazon =
He let the opportunity pass, or, He missed the opportunity. Li ne
povis uzi sian bileton, ĉar ĝia limtempo preterlasiĝis = He could
not use his ticket because its time limit had expired.
(15). Tralasi = to allow to pass through, as:—Li tralasis la
homon tra la pordo = He let the man pass through the door. Kiam ŝi
atingis la pordegon, ili ŝin tralasis = When she reached the gate,
they let her through.
Pesi and Pezi.
237 (e). Pesi = to weigh, to examine by balance (transitive).
- Pezi = to weigh, to have weight (intransitive).
- Peso = the weighing, the act of weighing.
- Pezo = the weight, or, heaviness of a thing.
- Pesilo = the scales, or, the weighing machine.
- Pezilo = a (metal) weight.
From the above words we see that the roots pes- and pez- both
signify "weight," and care must be taken to use the words in their
transitive or intransitive sense.
Examples. Tiuj ĉi tabloj estas de granda pezo: mi kredas, ke ilia
pezo estas pli ol cent okdek funtoj = These tables are a great
weight; I believe that their weight is more than a hundred and eighty
pounds. Tiu kesto estas tre peza; mi estas certa ke ĝi pezas
almenaŭ naŭdek funtojn; metu ĝin sur la pesilon, alportu la
pezilojn, pesu ĝin, kaj diru al mi la ĝustan pezon = That chest is
very weighty (heavy); I am certain that it weighs at least ninety
pounds; put it on the scales (weighing machine), bring the weights,
weigh it, and tell me the exact weight.
Povi.
237 (f). Povi = to be able. Beginners sometimes find a
difficulty in dealing with this verb, owing to the irregularity of
the English equivalents. For instance, the beginner may say, "How can
‘can’ be both present and future, or ‘could’ both past and
conditional?" The following examples giving translations of povi in
its various tenses should be helpful in removing the difficulty.
- Present, Mi povas = I am able to, I can.
- Past, Mi povis = I have been (or, was) able to, I could.
- Future, Mi povos = I shall be able to, I can.
- Future, Ni estos povintaj = We shall have been able to.
- Conditional, Mi povus = I should (or, would) be able to, or,
I could, or, I might.
- Conditional, Li estus povinta = He would have been able to, or,
He could have.
Examples.—Ĉu vi povas tion fari? Jes, mi povas = Are you able to
(can you) do that? Yes, I can. Mi ne povas
vidi la arbon, kiun vi montras = I cannot see the tree which you
point out. Mi povis fari tion, kion vi volis = I was (have been)
able to do what you wished. Mi ne povis fari tion, kion vi postulis
= I was not (have not been) able to do (I could not do) what you
required. Mi povos tion fari morgaŭ = I shall be able to (I can)
do that to-morrow. Se vi povus veni mardon, mi povus vin vidi = If
you should be able to (if you could) come on a Tuesday, I could see
you. Mi povus tion fari morgaŭ, se.... = I could (should be able
to) do that to-morrow if.... Ĉu li estos povinta plenumi la
laboraĵon, kiam vi lin vidos morgaŭ? = Will he have been able to
complete the work when you (will) see him to-morrow? Se vi venus
hieraŭ, mi estus povinta vin vidi = If you had come yesterday, I
could have seen you. Li povus veni, se li volus = He might (would
be able to) come if he wished (see pars. 237 (l), (m)).
Sidi.
237 (g). Sidi = to sit, to be sitting. Sidi has sometimes
the signification "to be" in some defined place.
Examples.—En la ĉambro sidis nur kelke da homoj = In the room
were (sat) only a few (some) men. La kuiristo sidas en la kuirejo =
The cook is (sits) in the kitchen. En la kandelingo sidis brulanta
kandelo = In the candlestick was (sat) a burning candle.
Sin trovi.
237 (h). Sin trovi = to find oneself. This expression (or,
troviĝi = to be found, to find oneself, to be, or, to be
situated) is often used for the English verb "to be."
Examples.—Sur la arbo sin trovis multe da birdoj = On the tree
were (found themselves) many birds. Super la tero troviĝas aero =
Over the earth is air.
Ĉesi, Daŭri, Pasi, Fini, Komenci.[17]
237 (i). In English the following and many other verbs are used in
both a transitive and intransitive sense:—to stop, to continue,
to pass, to finish,
to commence. In Esperanto ĉesi,
daŭri, pasi are intransitive; so, to make them transitive, we
must add IGI. On the other hand, fini and komenci are
transitive; therefore, to make them intransitive, we must add IĜI
(par. 280).
| Transitive. | Intransitive. |
| Ĉesigu tiun bruon = Cease (stop) that noise. |
La pluvo ĉesis fali = The rain ceased to fall (stopped). |
| Li daŭrigis sian rakonton = He continued his story. |
La ventego daŭris unu horon = The storm lasted an hour. |
| Li pasigis du horojn en la budo = He passed two hours in the booth. |
La tempo pasas rapide = Time passes rapidly. |
| Li finis sian laboron = He finished his work. |
La monato finiĝos morgaŭ = The month will finish to-morrow. |
| Ŝi komencos sian vojaĝon morgaŭ = She will commence her journey tomorrow. |
La semajno komenciĝis hieraŭ = The week commenced yesterday. |
Do, Did.
237 (j). The English verb "to do" is represented as follows:—
(1). In the sense of to "perform," "make," "commit," "execute," etc.,
it is represented by fari or agi.
Examples.—Ne faru tion = Don’t do that. Batante la knabon, li
faris (or, agis) malprave = He did wrong in beating the boy. La
ĉambristino faris tion, kion mi ordonis = The chambermaid did what
I ordered.
(2). In interrogation and negation it is represented by the present
and past tenses (pars. 58, 63, 64).
Examples.—Ĉu vi pensas, ke li venos? = Do you think that he will
come? Ĉu vi lin vidis hieraŭ? = Did you see him yesterday? Mi ne
konas lin = I do not know him.
(3). As an emphatic auxiliary, it may be represented by ja =
indeed, in fact, or other similar adverb: e.g., sincere (par.
217).
Example.—Mi ja esperas, ke li venos = I do hope he will come.
(4). As an inquiry after health.
Example.—Kiel vi fartas? or, Kia estas via sano? or, Kiel vi
statas? = How do you do? or, How are you?
(5). To "do," in the sense of "to cheat," by trompi or friponi.
In the sense of "to suffice" by sufiĉi.
Examples.—Li friponis min = He did (cheated) me. Tio sufiĉos =
That will do.
(6). Followed by prepositions, it must be translated in accordance
with the sense of the phrases.
Examples:—
- To do away with (abolish) = neniigi, (destroy) = detrui.
- To do business = komerci, fari negocon kun.
- To do for, or away with (murder, kill) = mortigi.
- To do into (translate) = traduki.
- To do well (prosper) = prosperi.
- To do up (arrange) = aranĝi, (tie up) = kunligi, (repair) = ripari.
- To do with (make use of) = fari uzon el.
- To do without (dispense with) = forlasi, ne bezoni.
Get.
237 (k). The English verb to "get" must be translated in accordance
with its numerous meanings. For instance:—
(1). To "get," in the sense of to "become," may be rendered by iĝi
= to become, or the suffix -IĜ-.
Examples.—Edziĝi = To get married (man). Edziniĝi = To get
married (woman). Leviĝi = To get up. Alproksimiĝi = To get
near. Laciĝi = To get tired. Tediĝi = To get bored. Ĉu vi
pretiĝas = Are you getting ready? Mi malsatiĝas = I am getting
hungry. Mi kutimiĝas je tio = I am getting accustomed (used) to
that. Mallumiĝas (or, Iĝas mallume) = It is getting dark. La
tagoj pli mallongiĝas = The days are getting shorter. La infanoj
kuŝiĝis = The children got into bed (lit., lay down). La
vespermanĝo malvarmiĝas = The dinner is getting cold; but
malvarmumi = to get (or catch) a cold.
(2). To "get," in the sense of to "make," to "cause," is rendered by
igi = to make, or the suffix -IG- added to a verb.
Examples.—Igu ŝin veni al nia dancado = Get her to come to our
dance. Mi presigos la libron baldaŭ = I shall get the book printed
soon.
(3). To "get," in the sense of to "have got," or to "possess," is not
translated.
Examples.—Mi havas (or, posedas) du ĉevalojn = I have got two
horses. Kion vi havas? = What have you got?
(4). To "get," in the sense of to "procure," "fetch," is rendered by
havigi, or, venigi.
Examples.—Mi havigos al mi tiom, kiom mi povos = I shall get as
much as I can. Venigu al mi veturilon = Get me a carriage. Venigu
la kuraciston = Send for (get) the doctor.
(5). "Get" is translated in various other ways according to its
meaning. Note the following examples:—
- Alveni en = To get to, to arrive at.
- Alkonduku mian ĉevalon = Get my horse.
- Alportu al mi la mustardon = Get me the mustard.
- Mi ricevis vian leteron = I got your letter.
(6). To "get," followed by prepositions, etc., must be translated in
accordance with the sense of the phrase.
Examples:—
- To get across = transiri.
- To get along, forward, on = antaŭeniri.
- To get at (attain, reach) = atingi.
- To get back (something lent) = rericevi, (to a place) = reveni.
- To get down = deiri, malsupreniri.
- To get off (be acquitted) = senkulpiĝi, (escape) = forkuri,
(a horse or coach) = deiri.
- To get dirty = malpuriĝi.
- To get on (a horse or coach) = supreniri, (in learning) = progresadi,
(in business) = prosperi.
- To get on with (continue) = daŭrigi.
- To get out (of doors) = eliri, (publish) = eldoni, or, elirigi.
- To get over (across) = transiri, (surmount) = venki.
- To get ready = pretigi (trans.), pretiĝi (intrans.).
- To get round (coax, allure) = logi, allogi, (persuade) = konvinki.
- To get up (rise) = leviĝi, (ascend) = supreniri.
Can and Could.
237 (l). "Can" and "could" are translated by povi = to be able,
except when "can" has the permissive sense of "may" (see par. 237 (m) (3)).
Examples.—Mi ne povas lin vidi nuntempe = I cannot see him at
present. Li ne povis iri hieraŭ = He could not go yesterday. Li
povus iri hodiaŭ, se li volus = He could (would be able to) go to
day, if he would.
For other examples of "can" and "could," see povi, par. 237 (f).
May and Might.
237 (m). These verbs are used (1) as auxiliaries in the English
Subjunctive mood; also to express (2) wish, (3) permission, (4)
possibility, (5) power or ability.
(1). When used as auxiliary verbs, they can be expressed by the
Esperanto Imperative mood.
Examples.—Li rapidas, por ke li alvenu ĝustatempe = He hastens
that he may arrive in time. Li kuris rapide, por ke li ne maltrafu
la vagonaron = He ran quickly that he might not miss the train.
(2). When they express "wish," the Esperanto Imperative is also
used.
Examples.—Vi estu feliĉa! = May you be happy! Via deziro
efektiviĝu! = May your wish be realized! Ĉielo vin benu! = May
Heaven bless you! Nenio difektu vian feliĉon! = May nothing mar
your happiness! Ĉia beno estu via! = May every blessing be yours!
In the above examples ellipsis takes place both in Esperanto and
English, some such words as mi deziras, ke ... = I wish that...,
being omitted (par. 66 (c)). Ke vi prosperu, estas mia fervora
deziro! = That you may succeed, is my fervent desire! Ke li vivu,
estis mia ĉiutaga preĝo! = That he might live, was my daily
prayer! Mi mortu, se mi iom mensogas! = May I die, if I am lying at
all!
(3). When they express "permission," some word denoting this must
be used, or the imperative may be used, the verb expressing
permission being omitted (par. 58 (a)). The English verb "can" is
sometimes employed to express the permissive sense of "may"; in
that case it is better to avoid the use of povi = to be able.
Examples.—Ĉu vi (oni) permesas, ke mi parolu kun vi? = May (can)
I speak to you? (lit., Do you permit that I speak to you?) Ĉu oni
permesas, (or, ĉu estas permesate), ke mi vidu la kastelon? =
May (can) I see the castle? Mi permesas, ke vi tion faru, se vi
volas, or, Vi faru tion, se vi volas = You may (I permit that you)
do that, if you like. Se mi estus permesita tion diri (or, se
estus permesite, or, se oni permesus, ke mi tion diru) = If I
might (were permitted to) say so (that).
The above questions may be shortened thus:—Ĉu mi parolu kun vi?
Ĉu mi vidu la kastelon? in this sense. The ellipsis understood here
might, however, equally well be Ĉu (vi volas, ĉu necesas,
ĉu estas bone, ke) mi parolu? vidu la kastelon? = Shall I (Am
I to) speak (see the castle)?
(4). When they express "possibility," some word showing that the
action is more or less a matter of
doubt must be used, as eble =
possibly, kredeble = probably, etc.
Examples.—Eble li venos = He may come, or, Maybe (possibly) he
will come. Eble li tranĉos la fingron, se vi donos al li
tranĉilon = He may (possibly he will) cut his finger, if you (will)
give him a knife. Eble li venus, se vi lin invitus = He might
(possibly he would) come, if you invited (were to invite) him. Se vi
tien irus, eble (kredeble) vi lin vidus = If you went (were to
go) there, you might (possibly, probably would) see him.
Note that the possibility of something happening varies with the
adverb used. "May" rendered by eble throws greater doubt on the
contingency than kredeble.
(5). When they express "power," or "ability," povi = to be
able can be used.
Examples.—La malsano povas konduki el komplikaĵoj = The illness
may lead to complications. Li povus tion fari, se li antaŭe volus
(or, estus volinta) ĝin fari = He might (could) have done that,
if he had wished to do it.
Shall and Will.
237 (n). These verbs are used in English to denote:—
- (1). Futurity.
- (2). Determination or will.
As they are sometimes misplaced, it would be well for the student,
not thoroughly conversant with their proper use, to consult some good
English Grammar.
(1). Futurity. As the auxiliary for the Future tense, "shall," in
direct speech, is generally used for the first person, and "will"
for the second and third persons, as "I, or we, shall go,"
"He, you, or they will go," except in interrogation, when
"shall" is generally used for the second person, as "Shall you go?"
But in indirect speech "shall" is used for all three persons, as,
"He says he shall come." "You say you shall write." In any of
these cases they are translated by the future in -os.
(2). Determination or Will. When the meaning is not futurity, but
determination on the part of the speaker, then, in direct speech,
"will" is used for the first person, and "shall" for the second and
third persons, as, "I will do it, you cannot stop me." "You shall
not kill that bird." "Thou shalt not steal." But in indirect
speech "will" is used for all the persons, as, "He says he will go"
(it is his determination to go). "You say you will try it" (you are
determined to try it). In such cases one must, in Esperanto, use not
the future, but the imperative, or some word expressing "will" or
"determination."
N.B.—In some cases it is difficult to tell in which of the above
senses "shall" or "will" is used, unless the context makes it clear;
so, in writing, we have to underline the words, or, in speaking, to
emphasize them strongly when they mean "determination." Note
carefully their meaning in the following sentences. The number
prefixed to each example denotes the heading under which it comes.
Examples.—(1). Mi revenos, kiam ili foriros = I shall come back
when they go away. (2). Mi intencas ĝin fari, ĉu vi konsentos, aŭ
ne = I will (intend to) do it whether you consent or not. (1). Vi
mortigos tiun birdon, se vi rekte pafos = You will kill that bird if
you shoot straight. (2). Mi ne permesas, ke vi mortigu tiun birdon
= You shall not (I do not allow you to) kill that bird. (1). Mi
scias, ke vi ĝin faros = I know that you will do it. (2). Mi
scias, ke vi povas ĝin fari, se vi volos = I know you can do it if
you will.
Note the difference in meaning of "shall" and "will" in the following
sentences:—I shall/will not see you to-morrow unless you come early.
If "shall" be used, it means that something will prevent the speaker
from seeing the individual; the speaker may be out, or engaged;
therefore, since the reason is unimportant, we can translate the
sentence, as in English, by the future, as:—(1). Mi ne vidos vin
morgaŭ, se vi ne (or, krom se vi) venos frue. But if "will" be
used, determination on the part of the speaker
is implied; nothing
prevents him; he could see you if he wished, but he will not
(won’t). Therefore, in Esperanto, we must express this determination,
and say (2). Mi ne volas (or, mi ne intencas) vin vidi morgaŭ,
krom se vi venos frue = I will not (I do not intend to) see you
to-morrow unless you come early. (1). Mi ne mortos sola = I shall
not die alone. (2). Mi ne volas (or, mi certe ne intencas) morti
sola = I will not (I certainly do not intend to) die alone. (1).
Ĉu vi estos (or, ĉeestos) tie ĉi morgaŭ? = Will you be here
to-morrow? (1). Jes, mi estos = Yes, I will. Note that "will" here
repeats the verb in the question, and is used instead of "shall."
(1). Li diras, ke li venos, sed (1) ĉu li venos? or, (2) ĉu li
volos? = He says he will come, but will he? Here the words "but will
he?" must be translated in accordance with the sense to be conveyed,
viz.:—(1) will something prevent him? (2) will he have the will?
The phrase "Shall I do that?" can be translated by the future, Ĉu
mi tion faros? = Is it a fact that I shall do that? or, Ĉu estos
plej bone tion fari = Is it best to do that? or, Ĉu estos
profite, saĝe, k.c. = Will it be expedient, wise, etc., or,
Ĉu decos, ke mi tion faru? = Will it be proper (right) to do that?
or, Ĉu vi volas (or, deziras), ke mi tion faru, or, Ĉu mi
faru tion? = Shall I (do you wish me to, Am I to) do that? (1). Ĉu
vi iros? = Shall you go? (2). Ĉu vi volas iri? = Will you go?
Ĉu vi volas, ke mi iru? or, Ĉu mi iru? = Shall I go? Am I to
go? (pars. 58 (a), 237 (m) (3)). "Will I go" is bad English, and
untranslatable!
Should and Would.
237 (o). "Should" and "would" follow the rules of "shall" and
"will" when employed in parallel circumstances. They express:—
(1). Supposition, or a future that is doubtful, conditional, or
merely supposed (par. 192), as "I should do it if I knew how."
(2). Duty or obligation (par. 237 (a)) as "He should not do
that."
(3). Determination, as "Nothing could influence him, he would do
it."
(4). The softening of an expression (par. 194), as "Would you
object to do that?"
(5). The future in indirect speech (par. 232), as "She said she
would (will) come."
(6). Would, when it signifies custom or habit, is sometimes
translated by adding the suffix -AD- to the verb.
The following sentences will show how these various meanings may be
expressed in Esperanto. The number before each example shows under
which class of meanings it comes.
Examples.—(1). Mi ĝin farus, se vi min permesus = I should do it
if you would permit me. (1). Li min frapus, se li ne timus = He
would strike me if he were not afraid. (3). Li insistis ĝin fari
malgraŭ la danĝero = He would do it in spite of the danger. (4).
Ĉu vi donus al mi tiun libron? = Would you give me that book? (1).
Se vi vidus Johanon morgaŭ (2) vi devus diri al li, ke li ne
aĉetu tiun domon = If you should see John to-morrow, you should
tell him not to buy that house. (5). Ŝi diris al mi, ke ŝi venos
= She told me that she would (will) come. (1). Mi iomete suspektis,
ke ili venos = I had a slight suspicion that they would come. (6).
Ili ofte rajdadis tra la arbaroj, kie la branĉoj tuŝadis iliajn
ŝultrojn, kaj la birdoj kantadis inter la freŝaj folioj = They
would often ride through the woods, where the branches would touch
their shoulders, and the birds would sing amid the fresh leaves.
Must, Ought.
237 (p). "Must" and "Have to" always signify physical or moral
obligation, and are stronger terms than "ought," which implies moral
obligation or duty. Compare "You must (have to, are to) go"
with "You ought to go." The former can be rendered by devi, and
the latter, "ought," by deci, or some word implying moral
obligation. Devi is also used for "ought" in the Conditional mood;
devus, in this case, being the softened form of the Conditional
mood (see par. 194). Care must be taken
not to translate "must" when
it signifies "have to" or "am to" by havi or esti (see
par. 237 (a) on devi).
Examples.—Li devas labori = He must (has to) work. Mi devas havi
tiun libron = I must have that book. Ĉio, kio troviĝas en tiu ĉi
libro, devas esti rigardata kiel deviga por ĉiuj = Everything which
is in this book must be regarded as obligatory for all. La
"Fundamento de Esperanto" devas resti severe netuŝebla = The
"Fundamento de Esperanto" must remain strictly unalterable
(untouchable). Vi devus ne fari tion, or, Ne decas, ke vi tion
faru = You ought not to (it is not proper, right that you should) do
that. Vi devus viziti (Decas, ke vi vizitu) la patron = You ought
to see (it is proper that you should see) your father. Li devus ne
forgesi (or, esti forgesinta) = He ought not to have forgotten.
Decas, ke mi alportu miajn servojn al la reĝo = I ought to offer
my services to the king. Kiam vi devos vidi la homon? = When must
you (will you have to) see the man? Mi devus vidi lin hieraŭ, sed
li malsaniĝis, tial nun mi devos atendi ĝis morgaŭ = I ought to
have seen him yesterday, but he fell ill, so now I must wait till
to-morrow.
N.B.—Note, in the last example, that the adverb hieraŭ =
yesterday, clearly shows the action is past; it is therefore
unnecessary to use the past infinitive esti vidinta.
238. Adverbs are more widely used in Esperanto than in any other
language. The root of every word, and any grammatical termination or
affix, the sense of which permits this, can be made into an adverb by
adding the adverbial termination E. This facility enables the
Esperantist to express in one word, to an unlimited extent, what in
other languages often takes two, three, or more words to express
adequately. E.g., Tiamaniere = In such a manner. Matene = In
the morning. Vespere = In the evening.
239. An adverb answers to a preposition accompanied by a
complement.
Example.—Li parolas saĝe = "He speaks wisely," has the same
signification as Li parolas kun saĝeco = He speaks with wisdom.
240. Adverbs are used to modify the meaning of verbs, adjectives,
or other adverbs.
Examples.—Li agas bone = He acts well. Tiu ĉi estas tre granda
domo = This is a very large house. Li skribas treege bone = He
writes extremely well.
N.B.—When an adverb seems to qualify a preposition, it really
qualifies an adverbial phrase, as:—Multe antaŭ la horo = Much
before the time (hour).
241. Position.—Adverbs, as a rule, immediately precede or follow
the words which they modify (see par. 88).
242. There are two classes of adverbs in Esperanto, which for the
sake of distinction we will call (a) "Primary" and (b)
"Grammatical."
(a). Primary adverbs are all to be found in the list of primary
words in Part V. They have no distinctive termination.
(b). Grammatical adverbs are those which are formed by adding E
to a root, grammatical termination, or affix. Some are formed by
adding E to a primary word.
A list of adverbs will be found at page 166.
243. No influence on case.—Adverbs exercise no influence on the
case of nouns, adjectives, or pronouns. If such be in the accusative,
it is not by the influence of the adverb. For example:—Mi amas
Johanon tiel varme, kiel mian fraton = I love John as warmly as my
brother. Here kiel exercises no influence on mian fraton, for
both mian fraton and Johanon are governed by the verb amas.
Therefore the meaning is that the speaker loves my brother and John
equally warmly. Or, we can place mian fraton in the nominative,
as:—Mi amas Johanon tiel varme, kiel mia frato = I love John as
warmly as my brother (does). Ask yourself the question, "as my
brother does what?" and the answer is "loves John." In English we are
obliged to add "does" or "loves him," but in Esperanto the meaning is
quite clear from the case of the noun (see also pars. 247 and 105).
244. Adverbs formed from Prepositions.—When a preposition has no
complement, noun or pronoun, the preposition then takes the adverbial
termination E. For instance, in the phrase mi staras apud li (I
am standing by him); apud here is a preposition because it is
followed by its complement li. But if li be omitted, we must
alter the sentence, as:—Li staras apude = He is standing by
(near).
245. Subject not expressed.—When, in a sentence in Esperanto,
there is no noun or pronoun which the adjective can qualify (as in
case of verbs in the infinitive, or used impersonally), the adverb is
used in Esperanto in place of the adjective.
Examples.—Mensogi estas honte (not honta) = To lie is shameful.
Estas necese, ke.... = It is necessary that.... Estas bele, varme,
malvarme = It is fine, warm, cold. Ne estas atendate, ke.... = It
is not expected that.... If, however, a noun or pronoun is expressed,
then the adjective is used, as:—La vetero (or, ĝi) estas
bela, varma, malvarma = The weather (or, it) is fine, warm,
cold.
245 (a). Participle-Adverbs.—In Esperanto, when the participle
relates to the subject (par. 211), but does not qualify it, then the
participle takes the adverbial form. For impersonal use see par. 164
(d).
Examples.—Legante, ni lernas = In (by, when, while) reading we
learn. Starante sur la supro de la monteto, li povis vidi la
preĝejon = By standing on the top of the hill, he could see the
church. Estante kolera, ŝi ne volis paroli al sia nevo = Being (as
she was) angry, she did not wish to speak to her nephew. Malferminte
la fenestron, li vidis la amason sur la strato = Having opened
(or, after opening) the window, he saw the crowd in (on) the
street. Ekrigardinte la libron, ŝi ĝin metis sur la tablon =
Having glanced (or, after glancing) at the book, she put it on the
table. Forpelite el la urbo, ili rifuĝis en la arbarego = Having
been (or, after being) driven from the town, they took refuge in
the forest. Batate de la lernejestro, la knabo terure kriegis =
Being beaten by the schoolmaster, the boy howled terribly.
246. Adverbs of quantity, like other words signifying quantity,
usually have their complement introduced by the preposition da.
Examples.—Multe da homoj = Many men. Nur malmulte da virinoj =
Only a few women. Kiom da ĉevaloj vi havas? = How many horses have
you? Multe pli da bovaĵo, ol (da) ŝafaĵo = Much more beef than
mutton. Malpli da pano, ol (da) vino = Less bread than wine. Tro
da kuiristoj malbonigas la buljonon = Too many cooks spoil the
broth. Ne estas sufiĉe da supo = There is not sufficient soup.
246. (a). Expressions such as "more and more," "at most," etc., are
thus rendered:—
Pli-malpli, pli aŭ malpli, plie aŭ malplie = More or less.
Plie = In addition, besides, moreover. Malplie = Less and
less.[18]
Pleje = At (the) most, mostly. Malpleje = At (the) least,
least.[18]
Troe = In excess, too many.
Examples.—Unu pomo plie aŭ malplie ne gravas = One apple more or
less does not signify. Plie, mi devas diri al vi, ke.... =
Moreover, I must tell you that.... Ni estos kvin pleje haj ili sep
malpleje = We shall be five at most and they seven at least. En la
kesto mi trovis du librojn troe = In the box I found two books too
many (in excess).
247. Adverbs and the accusative case.—Adverbs exercise no
influence on case (see par. 243), but used adverbially, participles
of active verbs are followed by the accusative if used without a
preposition (see par. 66 (b)).
After such adverbs as konforme, rilate, escepte, spite, etc.,
it is optional either to use the accusative or to add a suitable
preposition with the complement in the nominative, as konforme al,
kun, or je; rilate al; escepte de (or, kun la escepto de =
with the exception of); spite de (see par. 258 (a)).
248. Comparatives and superlatives.—These are marked in the same
way as adjectives (see pars. 112–114).
Examples.—Pli rapide, ol bone = More quickly than well. Malpli
forte, ol kutime = Weaker (less strong) than customary. Tiel
dolĉe, kiel eble (or, kiel eble plej dolĉe) = As sweetly as
possible. Ŝi kantas la plej bone el ĉiuj = She sings best of all.
Li agis tre saĝe = He acted very wisely.
248 (a). Adverbs and adjectives.—Be careful not to use the
adjective for the adverb.
Examples.—Li kuras rapide = He runs rapidly. Parolu pli laŭte
(not laŭta) = Speak louder (more loudly). Ŝi vidis lin
piediranta pli malrapide, ol kutime = She saw him walking (that he
was (is) walking) more slowly than usual.
N.B.—Note that piediranta is predicative (see par. 209 (b)).
LIST OF ADVERBS.
248 (b). The following list of adverbs contains all those found
amongst the primary words and some formed from them, also a number of
useful grammatical adverbs.
Adiaŭ = Adieu, farewell, good-bye.
Example.—Li diris al ŝi adiaŭ, kaj foriris = He said good-bye to
her, and departed.
Afrankite = Post-paid.
Ajn = Ever. Ajn is generally used after the correlative words
beginning with K, as kia, kiam, etc. (see table of correlative
words, par. 147). It then answers to words ending in "ever," but,
unlike English, it is never joined to the preceding word (par. 145).
Examples.—Kia ajn = Whatever kind of. Kiam ajn = Whenever,
whensoever. Kie ajn = Wherever, wheresoever. Kiel ajn = However.
Kies ajn = Whosesoever. Kio ajn = Whatever, whatsoever. Kiom
ajn = However much. Kiu ajn = Whoever, whosoever, whichever,
whichsoever.
Aliloke = Elsewhere.
Alivorte = In other words.
Almenaŭ = At least.
Example.—Donu al mi almenaŭ la duonon de tiu biskvito = Give me
at least the half of that biscuit.
Alvenante, Alveninte = On arrival.
Ambaŭ = Both, one and the other (pronoun).
Examples.—Ili ambaŭ kuris al la stacidomo = They both ran to the
station.
Ankaŭ = Also, too.
Examples.—Li ankaŭ ĝin faris = He, too, did it. Nek mi ankaŭ
= Nor I either (also).
Ankoraŭ = Yet, still. (See remarks on Jam).
Examples.—Ĉu li estas ankoraŭ tie ĉi? = Is he still here? Mi
ankoraŭ ne vidis lin = I have not seen him yet.
Antaŭe = Formerly, previously, beforehand, in front.
Aparte = Aside, apart, separately, specially.
Apenaŭ = Hardly, scarcely.
Example.—Mi apenaŭ pensas tion = I hardly think that (or, so).
Baldaŭ = Soon.
Example.—Mi esperas, ke li venos baldaŭ = I hope he will (may)
come soon.
Bis = Once more, again, encore.
Example.—Bis! = Encore!
Bonstate = In good condition.
Certe = Certainly.
Ĉi = The nearest (tio = that, tio ĉi or ĉi tio =
this), (tiu = that, the former, tiu ĉi or ĉi tiu =
this, the latter), (tie = there, tie ĉi or ĉi tie =
here), (tien = thither, tien ĉi = hither), (ĉio =
all, ĉio ĉi = all this) (par. 143).
Examples.—Restu ĉi tie = Remain here. Venu ĉi tien = Come
hither.
Ĉial = For all reasons, for every reason (par. 150).
Example.—Ĉial tio estas la plej bona = For every reason that is
the best.
Ĉiam = Always, ever (par. 151).
Example.—Li venas ĉiam, kiam oni ne bezonas lin = He always comes
when one does not want him.
Ĉiame = Perpetually, continually.
Example.—La infano ploras ĉiame (or, senĉese) = The child
cries perpetually.
Ĉie = Everywhere (par. 152).
Examples.—Ĉie mi lin vidas = Everywhere I see him. Li iras
ĉien = He goes everywhere.
Ĉiel = In every (manner) way, all ways (par. 153).
Example.—Tiu estas ĉiel la plej bona sidejo = That is in every
way the best seat.
Ĉiom = All of it, the whole, all, every quantity (par. 156).
Example.—Prenu iom, ne ĉiom = Take some, not the whole.
Ĉirkaŭe = Round about.
Ĉiufoje kiam, or, ĉiun fojon kiam, or, kiam ajn = whenever.
Ĉiujare = Yearly, annually, every year.
Ĉiumonate = Monthly, every month.
Ĉiusemajne = Weekly, every (each) week.
Ĉiutage = Daily. Laŭtage = By the day. Tage = By day.
Nokte = By night.
Ĉu = Whether. An interrogative adverb used at the beginning of a
direct question; it has no English equivalent. Ĉu simply shows
that the sentence is interrogative, and therefore, to translate it,
we must look to the tense of the verb and to the subject, so as to
preface the interrogation with "do," "does," "did," "have," "has,"
"is," "will," "shall," "was," "were," "should," "would," "can," etc.
etc.
Examples.—Ĉu vi komprenis? = Did you understand? Ĉu Johano
skribas? = Is John writing? Ĉu vi povas fari tion? = Can you do
that? (see remarks on Interrogation, par. 58).
Ĉu = whether (or if in the sense of whether) (a conjunction)
is used in indirect questions, when we generally use "if."
Examples.—Diru al mi, ĉu li venos = Tell me if (whether) he will
come. Diru al mi, se li venos = Tell me if he comes.
Ĉu ... Ĉu = Whether ... whether.
Example.—Ĉu li venos, ĉu li ne venos, Paŭlo foriros = Whether
he comes (will come) (or) whether he does not (will not come), Paul
will depart.
Dekstre = On the right. Maldekstren = To the left.
Denove = Afresh, again, once again.
Due = Secondly, in the second place.
Dum = While, whilst, as (also a preposition and conjunction).
Dume = Meanwhile.
Eble = Possibly, perhaps.
Eĉ = Even.
Examples.—Li eĉ pensis, ke.... = He even thought that.... Eĉ la
infanoj insultis min = Even the children abused me.
Efektive = In fact, really, as a matter of fact.
Ekstere = Outwardly. Interne = inwardly, internally,
within, inside.
Entute = On the whole, as a whole.
Facile = Easily. Malfacile = With difficulty.
Fine = In conclusion, lastly.
For = Away, forth.
Example.—For de ĉi tie fripono! = Get thee hence (away), rascal!
Forme = In shape, in form.
Galope = At a gallop.
Grandnombre = In great numbers.
Ĝisdate = Up to date. Ĝisnune = Up to now, hitherto.
Ĝisplue = Until further notice.
Ĝissate = Till satiety (is reached).
Ĝustatempe = Opportunely, to time.
Hieraŭ = Yesterday.
Examples.--Mi lin vidis hieraŭ = I saw him yesterday.
Antaŭhieraŭ = The day before yesterday.
Hieraŭ matene = Yesterday morning.
Hodiaŭ = To-day.
Example.—Li alvenos hodiaŭ = He will arrive to-day.
Hodiaŭ vespere = This (to-day) evening.
Ial = For some (any) reason, or cause (par. 150).
Example.—Ial li venis Londonon = For some reason he came to
London.
Iam = At some (any) time, once, ever (par. 151).
Examples.—Venu iam morgaŭ = Come some time to-morrow. Ĉu vi iam
renkontis lin? = Did you ever meet him?
Ie = Somewhere, (anywhere) (par. 152).
Examples.—Mi ne povas ĝin trovi ie en la ĉambro = I cannot find
it anywhere in the room. Ĝi estas ie = It is somewhere. Ĉu vi
metis ĝin ien? = Did you put it anywhere?
Iel = Somehow, in some way, in some manner, anyhow, (in
any way) (par. 153).
Examples.—Iel li sukcesas en ĉio = Somehow he succeeds in
everything. Respondu iel = Answer in some manner.
Iom = Somewhat, some quantity, a little, some (par. 156).
Examples.—La vetero estas iom pli varma = The weather is somewhat
(a little) warmer. Jen estas cigaroj, ĉu vi deziras iom? = Here
are cigars, do you want some?
Iomete = A very little, in a very slight degree, at all.
Example.—Ĝi estis iomete pli granda, ol kulo = It was slightly
larger than a gnat.
Intence = Intentionally, on purpose.
Ja = In fact, indeed.
Examples.—Li ja alvenos morgaŭ = He in fact will arrive
to-morrow. Ja may be used to express the emphatic English use of
"do," "did," as:—Mi ja volas, ke li estu tie ĉi = I do wish he
were here (par. 217).
Jam = Already, as yet, by now, now.
Examples.—Vi jam diris tion = You said (have said) that already.
Ĉu vi jam trovis vian horloĝon? = Have you as yet found your
watch? Mi ĝin ankoraŭ ne serĉis = I have not yet looked for
it. La knabo jam ne ridas = The boy does not laugh now (no longer
laughs).
N.B.—Compare jam with ankoraŭ. Jam shows that the circumstances
are changed; ankoraŭ, that
there is no change. Ex.:—La infano
jam dormas = The child is now sleeping (it was not sleeping
before). La infano ankoraŭ dormas = The child is still sleeping.
Jen = Behold, here. Jene = As follows.
Examples.—Jen estas tio, kion vi bezonas = Here is what (that
which) you want. Jen estas la libroj = Here are the books.
Jes = Yes, it is so (par. 63). Jese = Affirmatively.
Examples.—Jes, vi estas prava = Yes, you are right. Mi vin
certigas, ke jes = I assure you that it is so.
Ju pli ... des pli = The more ... the more (par. 112).
Example.—Ju pli mi lin konas, des pli mi lin amas = The more I
know him, the more I love him.
Ju pli ... des malpli = The more ... the less.
Example.—Ju pli mi lin vidas, des malpli li plaĉas al mi = The
more I see him, the less he pleases me.
Ju malpli ... des malpli = The less ... the less.
Example.—Ju malpli mi dormas, des malpli mi sentas la bezonon
dormi = The less I sleep, the less I feel the need (to sleep) of
sleeping.
Ju malpli ... des pli = The less ... the more.
Example.—Ju malpli mi trinkas, des pli mi manĝas = The less I
drink, the more I eat.
Ĵus = Just, at the (past) moment, just now.
Examples.—Mi ĵus vidis ŝin = I have just seen her. Mi ĵus
diris al vi lian nomon = I have just told you his name. Lia ĵusa
parolo = The speech he has just made.
Kaŝe or sekrete = In secret.
Kelkafoje or kelkfoje = Sometimes. Iafoje = At times.
Multfoje = Many times.
Kia ajn = Whatever (kind of) (par. 145).
Example.—Mi aĉetos de vi tiun libron, kia ajn ĝi estos = I will
buy from you that book whatever it may (shall) be.
Kial = Why, wherefore (par. 150).
Example.—Kial vi silentis? = Why were you silent?
Kiam = When, at what time (par. 151).
Example.—Kiam li alvenos? = When will he arrive?
Kiam ajn = Whenever, whensoever (par. 145).
Example.—Sendu lin al mi, kiam ajn li venos = Send him to me
whenever he comes (shall come).
Kie = Where, in what place (par. 152).
Examples.—Kie kreskas tiuj floroj? = Where do those flowers grow?
Diru al mi, kie li estas = Tell me where he is. Kien (accusative)
= Whither. Kien vi iras? = Whither (or, where) are you going? De
kie li venis? = Whence did he come?
Kie ajn = Wherever, wheresoever (par. 145).
Examples.—Kie ajn li estas, li estas ŝatata = Wherever he is, he
is liked. Kien ajn = Whithersoever. Oni lin estimus, kien ajn li
irus = He would be esteemed whithersoever he went (should go). De
kie ajn ĝi venis, ĝi estas tre bela katido = Whencesoever (from
wherever) it came, it is a very fine kitten.
Kiel = How, in what manner, like (in comparison = ... as).
Examples.—Kiel vi fartas? = How do you do? (how are you, or,
fare you?) Mi havas ian ideon kiel ĝin fari = I have some idea how
to do it. Tiel longe kiel = As long as. Se vi estus kiel mi = If
you were (should be) like me. Kiel eble plej bone = As well as
possible (as possibly, most well). Kiel bona vi estas! = How good
you are! (par. 153).
Kiel ajn = However, in whatever manner (par. 145).
Example.—Kiel ajn vi ĝin faros, faru ĝin bone = In whatever way
you (will) do it, do it well.
Kiom = How much, as much as, as far as (par. 156).
Examples.—Kiom kostas tio? = How much does that cost? Kiom mi
scias = As far as I know. Kiom li povos = As much as he can (will
be able).
Kiom ajn = However (many) much, whatever quantity.
Examples.—Mi ĝin aĉetos, kiom ajn ĝi kostos = I shall buy it,
however much it may (will) cost. Kiom ajn da teo estas tie, tiom
sufiĉas = Whatever quantity of tea is there, it (that quantity) is
sufficient (par. 145).
Kompare = Comparatively, in comparison.
Kompate = Compassionately, mercifully. Senkompate =
Pitilessly.
Kompreneble = Of course.
Kondiĉe = Conditionally, on condition.
Konforme = Conformably, in accordance.
Konsekvence = Consistently.
Konsente = By consent.
Kontente = Contentedly. Malkontente = Discontentedly.
Kontentige = Satisfactorily, in a satisfactory manner.
Kontraŭe = On the contrary, opposite to, vice versâ.
Kredeble = Likely, probably.
Kune = Together, jointly. Kune kun = Together with, along
with. Malkune = Separately.
Kvazaŭ = As if, as though, as it were (also conjunction).
Examples.—Li staris, kvazaŭ li vidas fantomon = He stood as
though he saw (sees) a phantom. Li parolis, kvazaŭ li vidis ŝin =
He spoke as if he had seen her.
Laŭlarĝe = In breadth, broadways, transversely.
Laŭlonge = In length, lengthwise.
Laŭvole = At option, at will.
Laŭte = Loudly, in a loud voice. Mallaŭte = Softly, in a
soft voice.
Lerte = Cleverly. Mallerte = Awkwardly.
Longe = Long, for a long time. Mallonge = Briefly, in
short. Antaŭ ne longe = Recently, not long ago, a short time
ago. De longe = Long ago, long since, for a long time.
Male = On the contrary, contrarily.
Malpleje = Least, at least.
Examples.—Li malpleje donis = He gave least. Ni estos tri
mapleje = We shall be three at least (see pleje).
Malpli = Less (for comparatives) (par. 112).
Example.—Georgo estas malpli forta, ol Johano = George is less
strong than John.
Malproksime = Afar, away, far off, in the distance.
Matene = In the morning. Vespere = In the evening.
Mem = Self, selves, very (pronoun) (par. 127).
Examples.—Mi mem iros = I shall go myself. Eĉ la virinoj mem
laboris sur la kampoj = Even the women themselves (or, the very
women) were working in the fields. Ĉe la pordo mem = At the very
door (door itself).
Morgaŭ = To-morrow.
Examples.—Mi iros tien morgaŭ = I shall go there to-morrow. Li
alvenos postmorgaŭ = He will arrive the day after to-morrow.
Multe pli multe da ... = Many (much) more of ... Nemulte =
Not much, not many. Malmulte = Little, few.
Ne = No, not, nay.
Examples.—Ĉu vi deziras kafon? = Do you wish for coffee? Ne, mi
jam havas = No, I have (some) already (see remarks on negation, par. 59).
Ne tute = Not entirely, not altogether, not quite.
Example.—Li ne estis tute malprava pri tio, kion li diris = He was
not altogether wrong in what he said.
Nenial = For no cause (reason) (par. 150).
Example.—Nenial li ĉesis skribi al mi = For no reason he ceased
writing to me.
Neniam = Never (par. 151).
Example.—Mi neniam vidis lin = I never saw him.
Nenie = Nowhere, in no place (par. 152).
Examples.—Nenie oni povis trovi mian hundon = Nowhere could they
find my dog. Mi iras nenien speciale = I am going nowhere in
particular.
Neniel = Nohow, by no means, in no way (par. 153).
Example.—Li neniel povis kompreni ŝin = He could in no way (not
at all) understand her.
Neniom = None, nothing, nothing at all, no quantity
(par. 156).
Example.—Li havas neniom = He has none at all.
Nepre = Unfailingly, surely, infallibly, without fail.
Example.—Tiu libro nepre apartenas al mi = That book certainly
belongs to me.
Norden = Northwards, to the north. Suden = Southwards, to
the south. Orienten = Eastwards, to the east. Okcidenten =
Westwards. Okcidente = In the west.
Nun = Now.
Examples.—Mi nun foriras = I am now going out. Mi ne povas lin
vidi nun = I cannot see him now.
Nune = At present.
Example.—Mi estas okupata nune = I am busy at present.
Nuntempe = Now-a-days, at the present time.
Nur = Only (but, in the sense of only), merely.
Example.—Li havas nur du ĉevalojn = He has but (only) two horses.
N.B.—Care should be taken to place nur in such a position in a
sentence so as to convey the required meaning of the phrase. It is
best generally to place it before the word to which it specially
refers (see par. 88).
Pace = In peace, peacefully.
Page = In payment. Senpage = Gratuitously.
Parkere = By heart.
Parole = Verbally, by word of mouth. Skribe = In writing.
Example.—Li tion komunikis al mi parole kaj skribe = He
communicated that to me verbally and in writing.
Pasie = With passion, passionately. Kolere, angrily.
Pere = Indirectly. Senpere = In a direct way, direct.
Persone = Personally, in person.
Piedire = On foot.
Example.—Mi trapasis la arbaron piedire = I traversed the wood on
foot.
(la) Plej = (the) Most (for superlatives), most (par. 113).
Examples.—La plej bela el ĉiuj = The finest of all. Vi agis plej
saĝe, farante tion = You acted most wisely in doing that.
Pleje = Most, mostly, mainly, at most.
Examples.—Ŝi donis pleje = She gave most. Pleje (or,
plejofte) mi forgesas, ke ... = Mostly (frequently) I forget
that ... Ni estos kvin pleje = We shall be five at most (see
malpleje).
Plezure = With pleasure.
Pli = More (for comparatives), rather (par. 112).
Examples.—Li ne vivos pli ol unu tagon = He will not live more
than one day. Pli kaj pli mi ŝin amas = More and more I love her.
Mi pli volis labori, ol ludi = I preferred to work than to play.
Plie = Further, moreover.
Plivole = Preferably, rather (par. 112).
Plu = Further, farther, more. Ne ... plu = No longer.
Examples.—Mi ne faros unu paŝon plu = I shall not go (make) one
step further. Li ne plu faros tion = He will not do that any longer
(more), or, He will no longer do that.
Plue = Furthermore.
Poduone = By half, by halves.
Poste = Afterwards, after, then.
Precipe = Especially, particularly.
Prefere = Preferably, rather.
Preskaŭ = Almost, nearly, well-nigh.
Examples.—Li preskaŭ falis = He nearly fell. Ni preskaŭ pensas,
ke ... = We almost think that ...
Pripensinte = On reflection.
Proksime = Near. Malproksime = Far off.
Proksimume = Approximately.
Prunte = On loan.
Example.—Mi prenis (donis) la monon prunte = I took (gave) the
money on loan.
Rapide = Rapidly, quickly, apace. Malrapide = Slowly,
tardily.
Rapidire = With speed, by express. Malrapidire = By slow
train.
Rave = Enchantingly, delightfully.
Ree = Again, in return.
Rekte = Straightforwardly, direct. Malrekte = Aslant.
Renversite = Topsy-turvy, upset.
Returne = Back. Returnen = Backwards.
Ŝajne = Seemingly.
Samtempe = At the same time, simultaneously.
Sekve = Consequently, therefore. Intersekve =
Consecutively, successively.
Sendube = No doubt; without doubt, doubtless.
Senintermanke = Continuously, without intermission.
Skribe = In writing.
Sovaĝe = In a wild state. Malsovaĝe = In a tame state.
Somere = In summer. Vintre = In winter.
Speciale = Specially.
Sube = Beneath, below, under, underneath.
Sufiĉe = Enough, sufficiently.
Supre = Above, up. Supren = Upwards. Malsupre = Below.
De supre = From above.
Surgenue = On one’s knees, kneeling.
Surprize = By (with) surprise.
Tial = Therefore, accordingly, for that (such) reason.
Example.—Tial mi konsilas, ke vi skribu al li = For that reason
(therefore, accordingly) I advise you to write to him (par. 150).
Tiam = Then, at that time. The correlative is kiam, and
tiam, kiam = then, when (or, when) (par. 151).
Examples.—Tiam ni povos iri al la kunveno = We shall at that time
be able to go to the meeting. Mi
vizitos vin (tiam), kiam mi venos Londonon = I will visit you
(then) when I (shall) come to London.
Tiamaniere = In this (such a) manner, thus.
Tie = There, yonder. Tien = Thither (par. 152).
Examples.—Ĉu iu estos tie? = Will anyone be there? Vi ne vidos
iun tie. = You will not see anyone there. Ĉu vi iras tien? = Are
you going thither (there)?
Tie ĉi, or, Ĉi tie = Here. Tien ĉi, or, Ĉi tien =
Hither, here (par. 143).
Examples.—Ĉu viaj fratoj estas tie ĉi? = Are your brothers here?
Venu tien ĉi = Come here (hither). Ĉi tie ni vidis amasojn da
viroj kaj virinoj (or, geviroj) = Here we saw crowds of men and
women.
Tiel = Thus, in that way, like that, so much so. Its
correlative in comparison is kiel. Tiel ... kiel = as ... as
(par. 153).
Example.—Li estas tiel forta, kiel vi = He is as strong as you.
Tiel ... ke = So ... that.
Example.—Li tiel kriegis, ke li raŭkiĝis pro tio = He shouted
so, that he became hoarse through it.
Tiom = As much, as many, so much, so many. Its correlative
is kiom, and tiom, kiom = as many as, as much as (par. 156).
Examples.—Tiom estas malfacile memori = So much is difficult to
remember. Li tiom laboris, kiom vi = He worked as much as you.
Donu al mi tiom da pomoj, kiom da piroj = Give me as many apples as
pears.
Tiom pli = So much the more.
Examples.—Tiom pli bone = So much the better. Tiom pli malbone =
So much the worse.
Trae = Right through.
Tre = Very, much.
Examples.—Li estas tre dika = He is very corpulent. Mi tre
estimas lin = I esteem him much.
Treege = Extremely, exceedingly.
Example.—Ŝi estas treege kolera = She is extremely angry.
Trie = Thirdly.
Triumfe = Triumphantly.
Tro = Too, too much.
Examples.—Li estas tro grasa = He is too fat. Mi lin tro amas =
I love him too much.
Troe = In excess.
Example.—Dudek funtoj troe = Twenty pounds in excess.
Tuj = At once, immediately, just (at the moment to come).
Examples.—Li tuj iris hejmen = He went home immediately (at once).
Tuj kantonta = just about to sing.
Tuj kiam = As soon as (immediately when).
Example.—Tuj kiam mi lin vidis, kuris al li renkonte = As soon as
I saw him, I ran to meet him.
Tute = Entirely, quite, utterly, stark.
Examples.—Vi estas tute prava = You are quite right. Li estas
tute freneza = He is stark mad.
Tute ne = Not at all.
Example.—Mi tute ne komprenas vin = I don’t at all understand you.
Unue = First, firstly, at first.
Verŝajne = Probably, presumably.
Vete = Emulously.
Vole = With one’s will. Kontraŭvole = Against one’s will.
Memvole = Voluntarily. Senvole = Involuntarily.
Vole-nevole = Willy-nilly.
Volonte = Willingly, readily.
248 (c). From the above list we see that the adverb is often used
in Esperanto in place of a preposition and its complement (par. 252).
Examples.—Ŝi estas nigre vestita = She is dressed in black. Li
donis al mi du ŝilingojn page por la libro = He gave me two
shillings in payment for the book. Forme ĝi estis simila al krono
= In shape it was like a crown. La libro estas angle skribita = The
book is written in English. Hamleto estas tradukita Esperanten =
Hamlet has been translated into Esperanto. Note that in the word
Esperanten the accusative of movement is used figuratively. (par. 67).
The following is a list of the 34 simple prepositions, showing the
paragraphs under which remarks and examples of their use will be
found:—
| | | Par. |
| Al | To, towards | 259 (1). |
| Anstataŭ | Instead of | 259 (2). |
| Antaŭ | Before, in front of | 259 (3). |
| Apud | Beside, close by | 259 (4). |
| Ĉe | At, with | 259 (5). |
| Ĉirkaŭ | About, around | 259 (6). |
| Da | Of | 259 (7). |
| De | Of, from, by | 259 (8). |
| Dum | During | 259 (9). |
| Ekster | Outside | 259 (10). |
| El | Out of | 259 (11). |
| En | In | 259 (12). |
| Ĝis | Till, as far as | 259 (13). |
| Inter | Between | 259 (14). |
| Je | (Indefinite) | 259 (15). |
| Kontraŭ | Against, opposite | 259 (16). |
| Krom | Besides, except | 259 (17). |
| Kun | With | 259 (18). |
| Laŭ | According to | 259 (19). |
| Malgraŭ | Notwithstanding | 259 (20). |
| Per | By means of | 259 (21). |
| Po | At the rate of | 259 (22). |
| Por | In order to, for | 259 (23). |
| Post | After, behind | 259 (24). |
| Preter | Beyond, past | 259 (25). |
| Pri | Concerning, of, about | 259 (26). |
| Pro | Because of, for | 259 (27). |
| Sen | Without | 259 (28). |
| Sub | Under | 259 (30). |
| Super | Above, over | 259 (31). |
| Sur | On | 259 (32). |
| Tra | Through | 259 (33). |
| Trans | Across | 259 (34). |
PREPOSITIONS (Prepozicioj).
249. Prepositions express the relation between words, showing how
some thing, action, or quality stands in relation to some other
thing, action, or quality.
Examples.—La riveroj fluas al la oceano = Rivers flow towards the
ocean. Li manĝas antaŭ la tagmezo = He eats before midday. Nia
domo staras ekster la arbetaro = Our house stands outside the
plantation.
250. Every preposition, but one, in Esperanto has a fixed and
definite signification, and great care must be taken to use the
preposition which gives the meaning we wish to convey. A careful
examination of the list of prepositions in par. 259 will show the
errors we should make by translating the English preposition into its
apparent corresponding one in Esperanto.
251. The preposition je is the only one in Esperanto without a
definite meaning. It should be used only when we have to employ a
preposition and are uncertain which we ought to select. We can,
however, omit the preposition, and put its complement (noun or
pronoun) in the accusative case, provided no ambiguity is likely to
arise through the presence of other accusatives in the sentence,
as:—Li ĝojas je tio, or, Li ĝojas tion = He rejoices at (or,
over) that. There is no Esperanto preposition which gives exactly
the English meaning of "at" or "over" in this sense. We might,
perhaps, say that these words are part of the verb "to rejoice at,"
or, "to rejoice over." The nearest Esperanto preposition would be
pri or pro = about, or, because of, and we could say Li
ĝojas pro tio = He rejoices because of that (see Rule 14, par. 94).
(a). Je, with the nominative, is generally used before the
complement of the adjectives "deep, high, long, thick, wide," but the
accusative without a preposition is equally correct.
Examples.—Profunda (alta, longa) je kvin futoj (or, kvin
futojn) = Five feet deep (high, long). La rivero estas larĝa je
kvindek metroj (or, larĝa kvindek metrojn) = The river is fifty
metres wide. We could, however, say, La rivero havas kvindek metrojn
da larĝo (or, da larĝeco).
252. Adverb for preposition.—An adverb is often used instead of a
preposition and its complement (par. 248 (c)).
Examples.—Li parolas saĝe = He speaks with wisdom, instead of,
Li parolas kun saĝeco. Li estis frapata perfortege = He was
being struck with great violence, instead of, Li estis frapata kun
perfortego.
253. Preposition omitted.—Not only the preposition Je (par.
251), but also other prepositions, are frequently omitted in
Esperanto where we use them in English; but in such case (as stated
in par. 68) their complements must be in the accusative to show the
omission. Care, however, must be taken that the omission does not
make the phrase ambiguous.
Examples.—Li venos la mardon proksiman (or, en la mardo
proksima) = He will come next Tuesday. Mi iros Madridon (or, al
Madrido) morgaŭ = I shall go to Madrid to-morrow. Mi lin vidis
la dekan (or, en la deka) de Julio = I saw him on the 10th of
July. Ni restis en la veturilo du horojn (or, dum du horoj) = We
remained two hours in the carriage.
(a). Prepositions are also always omitted between two substantives,
when the word nomata = named could be understood (par. 106 (d)), as:—
La urbo (nomata) Parizo = The city of (named) Paris. La monato
Septembro = The month of September. Li uzadas la lingvon
internacian (nomatan) Esperanto = He uses the international
language Esperanto.
(b). The preposition el = of, out of, is sometimes omitted in
such an expression as:—
Tri miaj parencoj = Three of my relatives (or, three relations of
mine).
254. Prepositions as prefixes.—Prepositions are frequently used as
prefixes, and when the compound word is a verb, the preposition is
often repeated before the indirect complement of the verb.
Examples.—Mi eliris el la korto = I went out of the courtyard. Li
eniris en la ĉambron = He entered (into) the room. La birdo
deflugis de la arbo = The bird flew from the tree. Li eliris el la
domo = He went out of the house. Or we could say, Li iris el la
domo, omitting the joined preposition.
255. Prepositions and case.—In contrast to prepositions in
English, which govern the accusative case, all prepositions in
Esperanto govern the nominative case. If the complement of a
preposition is in the accusative case, this is owing not to the
preposition, but to the rule that the accusative is used to show the
direction or place towards which movement (physical or otherwise) is
made (par. 67).
256. Preposition and the accusative of direction.—As already
stated in par. 67, the accusative is used when direction (physical or
otherwise) is implied towards something. But if the word towards
which such movement is implied is the complement of a preposition,
then such word is in the nominative or accusative, in accordance with
the following rules:—
(a). If the preposition denotes of itself movement, its
complement will be in the nominative, in accordance with Rule 8 that
prepositions govern that case.
(b). If the preposition does not of itself denote movement, then
movement is shown by placing its complement in the accusative
(par. 67).
257. Prepositions denoting movement.—The following two
prepositions denote movement, and consequently their complement is
never in the accusative:—Al = To, towards. Ĝis = Up to,
as far as.
As regards the others, the following are those in general use, whose
complement takes the accusative of direction when motion towards
something is implied:—Antaŭ = Before. Ĉirkaŭ = Around,
about. En = In. Kontraŭ = Against. Sub = Under.
Super = Over. Sur = On, upon. Tra = Through. Trans =
Across.
Examples.—Li staris momente antaŭ la spegulo, kaj tuj poste venis
antaŭ la reĝon = He stood for a moment before the looking-glass,
and then came before (into the presence of) the king. La infano
dancis en la korto, kaj poste kuris en la ĝardenon = The child
danced in (not into) the courtyard, and then ran into (not
in) the garden. Ĵetu tion sub la tablon = Throw that under the
table. Ĵetu la ŝtonon super la muron = Throw the stone over the
wall. Mi prenas sur min tiun ĉi aferon = I take upon myself this
business (moral movement, therefore accusative, since sur does not
of itself show movement). La knabo vadis trans la riveron kaj trans
ĝi trovis aliajn knabojn = The boy waded across the river, and, on
the other side of it, found other boys.
258. Prepositional expressions.—Adverbs are not unfrequently
followed by prepositions, thus forming prepositional expressions
which take the nominative case, like simple prepositions.
Examples.—Meze de la kampo = In the middle of the field. Funde de
kesto = At the bottom of a box. Flanke de la malliberulo = At the
side of the prisoner. Proksime de la preĝejo = Near the church.
Dekstre de la vojo = On the right of the road. Supre de la muro =
At the top of the wall. Dank’ al lia konsilo = Thanks to his
advice. Li venis kune kun sia frato = He came together (along) with
his brother.
Li estas for de tie ĉi = He is away from here. Oni plantis
arbon proksime de la puto = They planted a tree near the well. Metu
vian manon for de mia kolo! = Take your hand off (away from) my
neck.
(a). A few adverbs, used as prepositional expressions, are
sometimes followed by a suitable preposition and sometimes not; in
the latter case the complement is in the accusative, to show the
omission (par. 253).
Examples.—Koncerne tiun aferon (or, Koncerne je tiu afero) =
Concerning that matter. Konforme tion (or, Konforme al, kun or,
je tio) = In conformity with that. Rilate lian karakteron (or,
Rilate al lia karaktero) = With regard to (relative to, as regards,
referring to) his character (par. 247)
N.B.—These phrases are alternatives for simple prepositions. We
might, in some cases, use pri for koncerne je or rilate al, and
laŭ for konforme al.
(b). Two prepositions sometimes are used.
Examples.—"Eniru!" ekkriegis voĉo de en la pordo = "Come in!"
shouted a voice from within (inside) the door. Li rampis de sub la
sofo = He crept from under the sofa. La ŝtono havis la alton (or,
altecon) de ĉirkaŭ ok centimetroj kaj la larĝon (or,
larĝecon) de ĉirkaŭ kvin centimetroj = The stone had the
height of about eight centimetres and the width of about five
centimetres. El sub la tirkestaro la muso kuris sub la liton = Out
from under the chest of drawers the mouse ran under the bed. Ne
rapidu foriri de antaŭ li = Do not hasten to leave his presence (go
away from before him).
259. The relation of prepositions to their complement.—English
grammarians divide prepositions into various classes, but in
Esperanto, with the exception of those mentioned in par. 257,
denoting motion and rest, there are but two classes to which we need
pay special attention, viz., those which relate to both place and
time; and of these, two
only, viz., antaŭ = before, and post
= after, require care in making their meaning clear.
In the following remarks on prepositions the examples given of their
use are placed under the various classes that their English rendering
would assign to them; but we must bear in mind that, in accordance
with Rule 14, every Esperanto preposition, except je, has a
defined and constant meaning (par. 250). This defined meaning is
given at the head of each preposition. The meanings given in the
classes are only the various English renderings that can be given
to the preposition (see English prepositions, pars. 260, 261).
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
259 (1). Al = To, towards.
Denotes approximation or addition.
Approximation = To, towards.
Examples.—Li venis al ni = He came to (or towards) us. Mi iras
al Parizo, or, Mi iras Parizon = I am going to Paris. If al be
omitted, Parizon must be in the accusative of direction. Ni ne
vidas, ĉar la lumo estas kaŝata al ni per la kurtenoj = We do not
see, because the light is hidden from (towards) us by the curtains.
N.B.—Kaŝata al, not de, which, after a passive participle,
means "by"; but independently of this, al is logically used after
kaŝi, in the sense of "to hide from"; as:—Sed pro kio kaŝi al
li vian amon? = But why conceal from him your love?
Addition = To.
Examples.—Mi donis akvon al la birdoj = I gave water to the birds.
La rozo apartenas al Teodoro = The rose belongs to Theodore. Donu
vestaĵon al la malriĉuloj = Give clothing to the poor.
N.B.—With some verbs al is often used with the complement in the
nominative, when in English we omit the preposition, as:—Li
konsilis al mi fari tion = He advised me to do that. Ordonu al li
(or, Ordonu lin), ke li ne faru tion = Order him not to do that.
Al is also sometimes used with personal pronouns in a possessive
sense, as:—Li lavis al si la manojn, or, Li lavis siajn manojn =
He washed his hands (see par. 134).
As a prefix, al signifies "to," "towards," as:—Alveni = To
come to, arrive. Alpreni = To take to, adopt. Alpaŝi = To step
towards, approach.
259 (2). Anstataŭ = Instead of.
One of the prepositions that may be used before the Infinitive (see
remarks on Infinitive, pars. 177, 179).
Substitution = Instead of, for, in place of, as a substitute
for, in room of.
Examples.—Anstataŭ li, oni sendis lian fraton = Instead of him,
they sent his brother. Anstataŭ kafo li donis al mi teon = Instead
of coffee he gave me tea. Anstataŭ eliri, li restis en la domo =
Instead of going out, he remained in the house. Anstataŭ unu el la
oficistoj = In place of one of the officials.
Although, in the first two examples given in the preceding paragraph,
anstataŭ, being a preposition, is followed by the nominative,
nevertheless, the accusative is often used in such cases when its use
helps to remove ambiguity; the accusative being due to the omission
of a verb understood. Compare: Petro batis Paŭlon anstataŭ
Vilhelmo = Peter beat Paul instead of William doing so, with
Petro batis Paŭlon anstataŭ (bati) Vilhelmon, Peter beat
Paul instead of (beating) William.
As a root-word, Anstataŭi = To replace (intrans.).
Anstataŭigi = To replace (trans.), to substitute. Anstataŭulo =
A proxy (person instead of).
259 (3). Antaŭ = Before, in front of.
Denotes place or time. May take accusative of direction.
Place = Before, in front of.
Examples.—Oni metis antaŭ mi manĝilaron = They put before me a
table service. Morgaŭ mi petos permeson veni antaŭ viajn reĝajn
okulojn = To-morrow I shall beg permission to come before your royal
presence (kingly eyes). Antaŭ nia militistaro staris pafilegoj =
In front of our army were (stood) cannon.
Time = Before, ago.
Examples.—Antaŭ ne longe = Not long ago. Antaŭ kelkaj semajnoj
= Some (a few) weeks ago.
N.B.—Since antaŭ and also post are frequently used both in the
sense of "time" and "place," care must be taken to word a phrase so
that no ambiguity may arise. In sentences like the following, antaŭ
ol or antaŭ kiam should be used when time is implied.
Examples.—La gefianĉoj renkontiĝis antaŭ la gepatroj = The
betrothed met before the parents (= place, viz., in the presence of
the parents). La gefianĉoj renkontiĝis antaŭ ol (or, antaŭ
kiam) la gepatroj alvenis = The betrothed met before the parents
arrived (= time, viz., before the parents arrived). Johano venis
antaŭ la juĝiston, sed Jozefo estis elirinta el la juĝejo antaŭ
ol Johano alvenis = John came before the judge, but Joseph had left
the court before John’s arrival.
As a prefix, Antaŭdiri = To foretell. Antaŭiri = to precede.
259 (4). Apud = Beside, close by.
Place = By, near, near to, close by.
Examples.—La batalo apud Farsalo ŝanĝis multajn aferojn en Romo
= The battle near Pharsalia changed many things in Rome. Li estas
apud la pordo = He is near the door. Li staris apud Johano = He
stood by John. Mi vespermanĝos ĉe tiu tablo apud la fenestro = I
shall dine at that table close by the window.
As a root-word or prefix, we have:—Apudeco = Contiguity.
Apudesti = To be present, or near.
259 (5). Ĉe = At, with.
Marks the situation of a thing or action. Denotes coincidence, either
of place, time, or connection.
Place = At, with, to, on.
Examples.—Li estas ĉe ni = He is with us (at our house). Ni
estis ĉe via patro = We were at your father’s. Ŝi estas ĉe la
pordo = She is at the door. Ĉe la alia flanko de la strato = On
the other side of the street. Mi gastas ĉe miaj amikoj, Gesinjoroj
Smith = I am staying with (am a guest at) my friends, Mr. and Mrs.
Smith).
Time = At, on.
Example.—Ĉe nia alveno la hundo bojis = At (on) our arrival the
dog barked.
Connection = In, to, with, on.
Examples.—Brakon ĉe (or, en) brako = Arm in arm. Koron ĉe
koro = Heart to heart. Mi kredas, ke ĉe ĉiu vorto, kiun vi
diras.... = I believe that with every word you say.... Ĉe la
komparativo oni uzas la konjunkcion "ol" = With the comparative the
conjunction "ol" is used. Por elpagi mian konton ĉe vi, mi
sendas.... = To settle my account with you, I send.... Ĉe tia
vetero, vi estos baldaŭ resanigita = With such weather, you will
soon be restored to health. Ĉe tio = On that.
As a prefix, Ĉeesti = To be present. Inter la ĉeestantoj ni
rimarkis.... = Amongst those present we observed....
259 (6). Ĉirkaŭ = About, around.[19]
Denotes place, time, manner, quantity.
Place = About, around, round.
Examples.—Je ĉirkaŭ tri paŝoj = At about three paces. La
hundoj ludis kaj saltis ĉirkaŭ ŝi = The dogs played and jumped
around her.
Time = About.
Example.—La koncerto daŭris ĉirkaŭ tri horojn (or, dum
ĉirkaŭ tri horoj) = The concert lasted about three hours.
Manner = Round.
Example.—Li premis sian edzinon ĉirkaŭ la talio = He squeezed
his wife round the waist.
Quantity = About.
Example.—Mi volas aĉeti ĉirkaŭ kvar funtojn = I wish to buy
about four pounds.
As a prefix or root-word, ĉirkaŭ has the signification of
"encircling," as:—Ĉirkaŭfrazo = Periphrase, circumlocution.
Ĉirkaŭpreni = To embrace. Ĉirkaŭi, ĉirkaŭigi = To
surround.
259 (7). Da = Of.
Used only after words denoting quantity, measure, weight, number,
etc. Between two words, da shows that the first word measures the
second.
Quantity = Of.
Examples.—Granda nombro da ideoj = A great number of ideas.
Dudeko da homoj = A score of people. Funto da teo = A pound of
tea. Sur la arbo sin trovis multo (or, multe) da birdoj = On
the tree were (found themselves) many (of) birds.
Often de and da may be equally correct. Funto da teo emphasizes
the quantity required (funto); funto de teo emphasizes the
thing required (teo).
Do not use da before definite words like la, tiu, numbers, or
pronouns. Funto de la teo, de tiu teo, de mia teo, de ĝi.
Note the difference between "He ate a piece of bread" and "He ate a
piece of the (particular) bread." The former is Li manĝis pecon da
pano, and the latter Li manĝis pecon de la pano, de tiu pano.
N.B.—Glaso da vino = A glass of wine. Glaso de (or, por)
vino, or, vinglaso = A wineglass. Alportu al mi tetason, kaj
elverŝu por mi tason da teo = Bring me a teacup, and pour me out a
cup of tea.
Note.—Particular attention should be paid to the prepositions da,
de, and el, all of which are often translated by the English
preposition "of." Note the following examples:—
Da.—Cento da pomoj = A hundred (of) apples. Dekduo da kuleroj
= A dozen (of) spoons. Miliono da loĝantoj = A million (of)
inhabitants. Kvar metroj da ŝtofo = Four metres of material.
Ducent kilometroj da longo = Two hundred kilometres in (of) length.
De.—Tri estas duono de ses = Three is half of six. Ok estas
kvar kvinonoj de dek = Eight is four-fifths of ten. La domo de mia
frato = The house of my brother, or, My brother’s house. Doktoro
de juro = A doctor of laws.
El.—Ĉiu el la infanoj = Each of the children. Unu el ni = One
of us. Ni faru uzon el tio = Let us make use of that. Domo
konstruita el ŝtono = A house built of stone. La plej bela floro
el la ĝardeno = The most beautiful flower of the garden.
259 (8). De = Of, from, by.
De denotes origin, possession, place, time, cause, agency, and
disconnection or abstraction. It serves to form the genitive or
possessive case. These are all variations of the one primary idea:
origin.
De is not used in speaking of places, etc., when English uses the
preposition "of," where nomata = named might be inserted between
two substantives.
Examples.—La urbo Londono = The City of London. La monato Julio
= The month of July (par. 106 (d)).
Care must be taken not to confuse de with da.
Possession = Of.
Examples.—La libro de Petro = The book of Peter, or, Peter’s
book. La domo de mia kara patro = My dear father’s house.
Origin or Dependence = Of, on, from.
Examples.—Ĝi dependas de la nombro de vortoj = It depends on the
number of words. Tio venis de (or, el) lia unua eraro = That
came from his first error. Li
estas doktoro de medicino = He is a doctor of medicine. Li venis
de (or, el) Parizo kaj nun iras al Berlino = He came from Paris
and is now going to Berlin. Kaj Dio diris: "Kolektiĝu la akvo de
sub la ĉielo en unu lokon" = And God said: "Let the waters (water)
(from) under the heaven be gathered together (collect itself) into
one place."
Place = From, of, to.
Examples.—For de tie ĉi, fripono! = Away from here, rascal! Li
forestas de tie ĉi = He is away from here. Li staris meze de la
malamikoj = He stood in the midst of the enemy. Proksime de la domo
staris arbo = Near (to) the house stood a tree. Ne malproksime de
la dometo staris preĝejo = Not far from the cottage was (stood) a
church.
Time = From, since, for.
Examples.—De tiu tempo = From (since) that time. De la kreo de la
mondo = Since the creation of the world. De tri semajnoj mi estas
malsana = For three weeks I have been (am) ill.
Cause = From, of, with.
Examples.—Li eksaltis de surprizo = He started (jumped) with
surprise. Li mortis de febro = He died of (from) fever. Kaŭze de
tio = Because of (due to) (owing to) that.
Agency = By (after a passive verb, to show the agent). To show
the means per is used.
Examples.—Mi estas amata de mia patro = I am loved by my father.
La domo konstruita de mia patro estas kovrita per ardezoj = The
house built by my father is covered with slates.
Disconnection or Abstraction = From.
Example.—Apartigu la pajlon de la fojno = Separate the straw from
the hay.
As a prefix, de signifies "off," "from," as:—Li deprenis la
libron de la breto (or, li prenis la libron for de sur la breto) =
He took the book off the shelf. Li demetis la ĉapelon = He took
off his (the) hat.
259 (9). Dum = During.
Dum, whether used as a preposition or conjunction, always relates
to duration of time (see note below).
Time = During.
Examples.—Dum la tuta tago (or, La tutan tagon) li restis sola
= During the whole day he remained alone, or, He remained alone the
whole day. Dum (or, En la daŭro de) kelkaj monatoj, ŝi ne
eliradis el sia ĉambro = During (for the space of, for) some months
she did not leave (go out of) her room. Li dormis dum la tuta
koncerto, or, Li dormis la tutan koncerton = He was sleeping
during the whole (all through the) concert. Dum ilia konsiliĝo
(or, Dum ili konsiliĝis) mi restis en la apuda ĉambro = During
their consultation (or, whilst they were consulting) I remained in
the adjoining room.
Note.—Dum, although frequently used as a conjunction by Dr.
Zamenhof, is rarely, if ever, used by him as a preposition. For our
preposition "during" he generally uses the accusative of duration, or
the prepositional expression en la daŭro de, or simply en, or
turns the phrase by employing an adverbial present participle.
259 (10). Ekster = Outside.
Place = Outside. Ekster is the opposite of en = in.
Examples.—Li iris en la domon, sed mi restis ekster ĝi = He went
into the house, but I remained outside it. Li loĝas ekster la urbo
= He lives outside the town.
Connection or Disconnection. Ekster is sometimes used as a
synonym of krom (par. 259 (17)).
Examples.—Ekster tiuj ĉi leĝoj, ekzistas aliaj = Outside
(besides, or, in addition to) these laws others exist. Ekster tiuj
ĉi leĝoj ne ekzistas aliaj = Outside (beside, or, apart from)
these laws others do not exist.
As a root-word or prefix, we have:—Eksteraĵo = The exterior,
outside. Eksterlande = Abroad.
259 (11). El = Out of.
El is the opposite of en = in, but only when movement in and
out is implied.
Care must be taken not to confuse el with da or de, both of
which also signify "of," that English preposition with so many
meanings. El means essentially "out of," denoting that the noun
specified is a portion of something, or is made of some
particular material, or issues from something (see par. 259 (7)).
Origin or Dependence = Of, with, from.
Examples.—Mi estas la plej riĉa el ĉiuj = I am the richest of
all. Unu el ni estos elektata = One of us will be chosen. Li faris
uzon el ĉio = He made use of everything. Mi faros uzon el la
okazo = I shall take (make use of) the opportunity. Kion ni faros
el hundo? = What shall we do with (make out of) a dog? El la dirita
regulo sekvas, ke ... = From the said rule, it follows that ... Mi
ricevis leteron el Parizo = I received a letter from Paris.
Disconnection = Out of, from.
Examples.—Tri musoj elsaltis el la tirkesto = Three mice jumped
out of the drawer. Mi eliris el la domo ĝuste kiam li eniris en la
veturilon = I went out of the house just as (when) he entered the
carriage. La violono falis el la violonujo = The violin fell out of
the violin case. El sub la lito = Out of (out from under) the bed.
As a prefix, el signifies "out," and also denotes something done
thoroughly well or completely, as:—Elpensi = To think out, to
invent. Elfosi = To dig out. Elirejo = An exit, way out.
Ellabori = To work out thoroughly, to achieve, elaborate.
Eltrinki = To drink up. Ellerni = To master, to learn thoroughly
(to study).
259 (12). En = In, into.
May take after it the accusative of movement, and has then the
meaning of "into."
Place = In, into, within, at.
Examples.—Li estas en la ĝardeno = He is in the garden. Li iris
en la ĝardenon = He went into the garden. Mi loĝas en Parizo = I
live in Paris. La birdo flugas en la ĉambro (ĝi estas en la
ĉambro, kaj flugas en ĝi) = The bird is flying within the room (it
is in the room, and is flying in it). La birdo flugas en la ĉambron
(ĝi estis ekster la ĉambro, kaj nun flugas en ĝin) = The bird is
flying into the room (it was outside the room, and now is flying into
it). Helpu min porti tiujn ĉi kestojn en mian fiakron = Help me to
carry these trunks to (into) my cab. Li iris en la domon, sed mi mem
restis ester ĝi = He went into the house, but I myself remained
outside of it. La ĉefa vorto staras en la fino = The chief word
stands at the end.
Time = In, on, at, during.
Examples.—En printempo floroj aperas = In (during) spring flowers
appear. En la tago = On the day. En la unua tempo = At the outset
(first time), at first. Mi finos la tasketon en dek tagoj, se mi
laboros en ĉiu tago po ok horoj = I shall finish the job (little
task) in 10 days if I work 8 hours a day (lit., if I shall work in
each day at the rate of 8 hours).
Origin or Dependence = Of, into.
Examples.—Apartamento konsistanta en (or, el)[20] unu
manĝoĉambro, unu salono, kaj tri dormoĉambroj = A flat
(apartment), consisting of one dining-room, one drawing-room, and
three bedrooms. Aleksandro ŝanĝiĝis en polvon = Alexander was
turned into dust.
Connection = In.
Example.—Manon en mano = Hand in hand.
259 (13). Ĝis = Till, as far as.
Place = To, down to, up to, as far as.
Examples.—Ni akompanis ilin ĝis ilia domo = We accompanied them
as far as (to) their house. Iru ĝis la rivero = Go to (down to, as
far as) the river.
Time = Till, until, to.
Examples.—De sabato ĝis mardo = From Saturday till (to) Tuesday.
Ni devas atendi ĝis Junio = We must wait till June. Ĉu ne estus
pli bone atendi ĝis ni havos la hundon? = Would it not be better to
wait till we have the dog? Ĝi povas kuŝi ok ĝis naŭ jarojn = It
can lie eight to nine years.
N.B.—Jarojn is the accusative of duration (par. 68 (b)), for
ĝis has here no influence over it, being simply an item in the
phrase; but if a preposition be placed before ok, then the
preposition will influence its complement "jaroj," which will be in
the nominative; as:—Ĝi povas kuŝi dum (or, je) ok ĝis naŭ
jaroj = It can lie during eight (up) to nine years.
259 (14). Inter = Between, among.
Inter differs from en, in that en implies that something is
actually in, or within, something else, while inter implies that
something is between, or among, some other things.
Place = Between, among.
Example.—Inter Rusujo kaj Francujo estas Germanujo = Between
Russia and France is Germany.
Time = Between.
Example.—Inter la deka kaj dek-unua matene, mi renkontis mian
amikon = Between 10 and 11 o’clock in the morning I met my friend.
Manner = Among, amongst.
Example.—Ili dividis inter si dek du pomojn = They divided amongst
themselves twelve apples.
As a prefix, inter has much the same meaning as in English,
as:—Intermeti = To interpose. Intermiksi = To intermingle.
Interkonsenti = To agree mutually.
259 (15). Je.
The preposition je has no fixed meaning. It is used only when we
have to employ a preposition and we do not know which one the sense
requires.
We can, however, use the accusative case in place of it
(Rule 14, pars. 251, 253).
The following are a few of the examples in which it has been used:—
Cause = At, over, of.
Example.—Mi enuas je la hejmo, or, Mi enuas la hejmon = I am
weary (tired) of home.
Manner = By, on.
Examples.—Li tenis lin je la maniko per unu mano, kaj per la alia
li batis lin sur la vizaĝon (or, li frapis al li la vizaĝon) =
He held him by (at) the sleeve with one hand, and with the other he
struck him on the face (struck to him the face). Mi gratulas vian
princan moŝton je (or, pri) la reveno Danujon = I congratulate
your Royal (Princely) Highness on (regarding) your (the) return to
Denmark.
Time = At, on.
Examples.—Je la kvara horo = At 4 o’clock. Je la lasta fojo (or,
La lastan fojon) mi vidis lin ĉe vi = On the last occasion (last
time) I saw him with you.
Measure = Of, by.
Example.—Longa je dek futoj, or, Longa dek futojn = Ten feet
long.
259 (16). Kontraŭ = Against, opposite.
Never used in the sense of "by the side of." May take the accusative
of direction.
Place = Towards, overlooking, against, facing, opposite.
Example.—La fenestro kontraŭ la strato = The window overlooking
(towards) the street.
Opposition = To, against, from.
Examples.—Vizaĝon kontraŭ vizaĝo = Face to face. Kontraŭ min
mem, sin turnis mia ruzo = Against
myself my cunning turned (itself) (Hamlet, V, 2). Kien ili iras?
Kontraŭ Polujon = Whither are they going? Against Poland (Hamlet,
IV, 4). Mi sidis sur ŝtono, kie mi estis ŝirmata kontraŭ la
orienta vento = I was sitting on a stone where I was sheltered from
(against) the east wind. Li batalis kontraŭ la grekoj = He fought
with (= against) the Greeks.
As a prefix, kontraŭ denotes opposition, as:—Kontraŭdiri =
To contradict. Kontraŭmeti = To oppose.
259 (17). Krom = Not including, putting aside, apart from.
One of the prepositions that may be used before the Infinitive (par. 177).
Separation, Exclusion = Besides, except, save, but.
Examples.—Li estas bona, kaj, krom tio, riĉa = He is good, and,
besides that, rich. Krom Esperanto, mi scias la lingvon germanan =
Besides Esperanto, I know the German language. Mi estas anglo, kaj
mi scias nenian lingvon krom mia propra = I am an Englishman, and I
know no language except (but, besides, save) my own (see remarks on
ekster (par. 259 (11)).
259 (18). Kun = With.
Never used as "with" in the sense of the instrument or means by which
something is done (see per, par. 259 (22)).
Connection = With, to.
Examples.—Li paroladis kun sia amiko = He was conversing with his
friend. Li fianĉiĝis kun Fraŭlino Berta = He became engaged to
Miss Bertha. Resti kun leono estas danĝere = To stay with a lion
is dangerous. Li promenadis kun sia amiko, kiam mi lin renkontis =
He was walking with his friend when I met him.
Manner = With, of.
Examples.—Li parolas kun granda saĝeco = He speaks with great
wisdom. Li estas homo kun gusto = He is a man of (with) taste. Li
estis atendata kun
granda senpacienco = He was expected with great impatience.
As a root-word or prefix, Kunigi = To connect. Kunulo = A
companion. Kunveni = To come together, to assemble.
259 (19). Laŭ = According to.
Manner = According to, from, in, in accordance with.
Examples.—Li agis laŭ sia opinio = He acted according to his own
opinion. Tiu vazo estas farita laŭ modelo el (or, en) nia
muzeo = That vase has been made according to (from) a model out of
(in) our museum. Li parolas laŭ saĝa maniero = He speaks in a
wise manner. Ili ĝin faris laŭvice = They did it in turn. La pli
juna filino estis la plena portreto de sia patro laŭ sia boneco =
The younger daughter was the complete portrait of her father in
(according to) her goodness.
Place and Direction = In, along.
Examples.—Ni foriris laŭ malsamaj direktoj (or, en diversajn
flankojn) = We went away in a different direction (or, in
different ways). Aleksandro iris laŭ tiu ĉi rivero ĝis li venis
al la palaco = Alexander went along this river till he came to the
palace.
N.B.—Laŭ is used in such expressions as:—Laŭlonge =
Lengthways. Laŭlarĝe = Across, athwart.
259 (20). Malgraŭ = Notwithstanding.
Opposition = In spite of, notwithstanding, for, despite.
Examples.—Li sukcesis malgraŭ la malhelpoj = He succeeded in
spite of the hindrances. Li faris sian eblon, sed malgraŭ ĉio, li
ne sukcesis = He did his best (his utmost), but for all that
(notwithstanding) he did not succeed (see remarks on spite, par. 259 (30)).
259 (21). Per = By, by means of.
Cause = By, by means of, with, through.
Examples.—Ni flaras per la nazo, vidas per la okuloj, kaj aŭdas
per la oreloj = We smell with the
nose, see with the eyes, and hear with the ears. Li mortigis lin per
glavo = He killed him with a sword. Tion mi eksciis per mia frato
= I learnt that through my brother.
Manner = With, by, in.
Per, used after a passive verb, denotes the means or instrument;
de denotes the agent.
Examples.—La domo, kiu estas aĉetita de mia patro, estas kovrita
per pajla tegmento = The house, which was bought by my father, is
covered with thatch (a straw roof). Li tenis lin ĉe la kolo per
ambaŭ manoj = He was holding him by the neck with both hands. Li
iris el la urbo per (or, laŭ) flanka vojeto = He went out of
the town by a by-path. Mia onklo ne mortis per natura morto = My
uncle did not die (by) a natural death. Per unu vorto (or,
unuvorte), la ĉambro estis tute bela = In a word, the room was
quite beautiful.
As a prefix or root-word, per is not much used. Perlabori = To
acquire by one’s labour, to earn. Peri = To mediate, to interpose.
259 (22). Po = At the rate of.
Po has a distributive sense, and is used generally before numerals
(see par. 123). Do not confuse po with por.
Distribution = At the rate of, in the proportion of, at.
Examples.—Mi aĉetis kvar pomojn po du pencoj = I bought four
apples at the rate of twopence (each). "Por du pencoj" would mean
"for twopence" (all four for twopence). Tiu ĉi libro havas sesdek
paĝojn; tial, se mi legos en ĉiu tago po dek kvin paĝoj, mi finos
la tutan libron en kvar tagoj = This book has 60 pages; therefore,
if I (shall) read (in) each day at the rate of 15 pages, I shall
finish the whole book in 4 days. Silko po 5 ŝilingoj por ulno =
Silk at 5 shillings a (for a) yard (ell).
As a prefix, Poduone = By half, or, by halves. Pogrande =
Wholesale.
259 (23). Por = For, for the sake (benefit) of, in order
to.
One of the prepositions that may be used before the infinitive (see
remarks on infinitive, par. 177).
Purpose = In order to, to, for, at, for the purpose of,
of, on.
Examples.—Mi manĝas por vivi = I eat in order to live. Por mi
ĝi havas bonan guston = To me it has a pleasant (good) taste. Li
sin kuracis por resaniĝi = He treated himself (took remedies) in
order to recover (be restored to health). La plej bona metodo
(por) akiri ĝin = The best way of getting it (in order to get
it). Mi havas multon por fari = I have much to do. Por miaj kvar
infanoj mi aĉetis dek du pomojn = For my four children I bought
twelve apples. Litoj por du personoj = Beds for two people. Tiu
ĉi ringo estas por vi = This ring is for you. Por ĉio (or, pro
ĉio) ni lin dankas = We thank him for everything. Por tiu ĉi
prezo = At this price. Ni devas konfesi por ŝia laŭdo, ke ... =
We must confess to her praise that ... Mi ne havas tempon por fari
tion = I have not time to do that. Kiam la momento por foriri
alvenis, or, Kiam la momento de foriro alvenis ... = When the
moment for departure arrived ... Tiu libro estas facile komprenebla
por ĉiuj = That book is easily comprehensible by (for) all. Li
aĉetis por unu penco da teo = He bought a pennyworth (for a penny)
of tea.
259 (24). Post = After, behind.
Is a preposition of place and time. Like its English equivalent
"after," care must be taken not to confuse its meaning. For instance,
"He came after me" might mean (a) next in succession or behind me,
(b) after my arrival, (c) in pursuit of me. In Esperanto we
should say:—(a). Li venis post mi. (b) Li venis post mia
alveno. (c). Li postsekvis min (see also remarks on antaŭ,
which is the opposite of post (259 (3)).
Place = After, behind.
Examples.—Post la reĝo venis lia sekvantaro = After (behind) the
king came his suite. "Da" post ia vorto montras, ke tiu ĉi vorto
havas signifon de mezuro = "Da" after any (some) word shows that
this word has the signification of measure.
Time = After, in, by, hence.
Examples.—Resendu al mi la libron (post) kiam vi estos traleginta
ĝin = Send back to me the book after you have read it through.
Post tri monatoj estos la edziĝo = The wedding will be three
months hence (in three months). Post kvarono da horo = In a quarter
of an hour. Tagon post tago = Day by day.
Manner = After, by.
Examples.—Ili sekvis unu post la alia = They followed one after
another. Iom post iom ŝi pli trankviliĝis = Little by little she
became more tranquil.
As a prefix, Postveni = To come after, to succeed. Posttagmezo
= Afternoon. Postvivi = To survive.
259 (25). Preter = Beyond, past, by.
Differs from trans = across (beyond), in that preter shows
the movement of something passing by, or alongside, something else.
Trans signifies that something is on the other side of a boundary,
or is crossing, or has crossed that boundary (see also tra, par. 259 (33)).
Place = Beside, by, past.
Examples.—Mi iris preter la fenestroj de la domo = I went by
(past, beside) the windows of the house. Du sinjorinoj iris preter
ni, kaj transiris la straton = Two ladies passed (went) by us, and
crossed the street.
Preter, as a prefix, has a similar meaning.
Examples.—Mi preteriris la fenestrojn de la domo = I passed by the
windows of the house. Du sinjorinoj preteriris nin = Two ladies
went by (passed) us. Mi preterlasis lin = I let him pass by (I let
him beyond). Li preterlasis la okazon = He let the occasion
(opportunity) pass, or, he missed the opportunity.
259 (26). Pri = Concerning.
Pri can be translated in various ways.
Reference = Concerning, respecting, regarding, as regards,
with regard to, as to, as for, about, of, on.
Examples.—Pri mia lerteco, mi povas diri ... = Concerning my
skill, I can say ... (In this sentence it will be observed that any
of the above meanings of pri instead of "concerning" will give the
exact sense.) Pri tio ne diru vorton = As to that, don’t say a
word. Ne pensu pri ĝi = Do not think of (about) it. Li parolis
pri la pentrarto = He spoke about (the art of) painting. Ili
miregis pri (or, je) lia kolero = They were astounded at (about)
his anger. Sed pri ŝia fratino, ni povas diri, ke ... = But of her
sister, we can say that ... Tio estas verko pri la politiko = That
is a work on politics. Vi estas prova pri tio = You are right in
that.
As a prefix, Pripensi = To think about, to reflect.
See par. 258 (a) as regards the use of the prepositional
expressions rilate, koncerne.
259 (27). Pro = Because of.
Pro always relates to the cause or reason for something happening
or being done. Do not confuse it with por.
Cause = Because of, by reason of, on account of, for the
sake of (cause), through, owing to, from, for, of.
Examples.—Li demandis ŝin, pro kio ŝi ploras = He asked her for
what reason (because of what) she wept (weeps). Li min mokis pro mia
kredemo = He ridiculed me owing to (for) my credulity. Li estas
mortanta (or, ekmortas) pro (or, de) malsato = He is dying
of (from) hunger. Ŝi agas pro ĵaluzemo = She acts from jealousy.
Li ne povis piediri pro sia malforteco = He could not walk owing to
(on account of, through) his weakness. Pro tio, mi ne povas akompani
vin = On that account, I cannot accompany you. Li ĝin faris pro
sia edzino = He did it because of his wife.
Pro is not used much as a prefix. Propeti = To intercede.
Propekulo = A scapegoat.
259 (28). Sen = Without.
Sen always denotes disconnection.
Disconnection = Without, less, minus.
Examples.—Li alvenis sen sia amiko = He arrived without his
friend. Sen vi, ni estus kiel sen kapo = Without you we should be
as without a head. Dek sen tri estas sep = Ten less (minus) three
is seven.
Sen is frequently used as a prefix, having the same meaning as our
English suffix "less," as:—Sendube = Doubtless, without doubt.
Sensenta = Senseless, without feeling. Sensenca = Senseless,
without meaning. Senhonta = Shameless, without shame.
259 (29). Spite = In defiance of.[21]
Spite, like malgraŭ, marks opposition, but in a stronger sense.
Spite means "in defiance of opposition," whilst malgraŭ has more
the sense of "notwithstanding." Spite is not a preposition, but an
adverb, and to translate the prepositional form "in spite of" it is
usually better to use malgraŭ.
Opposition = In defiance of, defiantly.
Examples.—Spite ĉion, kion mi povis diri, li vangfrapis la
infanon = In defiance of all I could say, he slapped the child’s
face. Spite mian malamikon = In defiance of my enemy.
259 (30). Sub = Under.
Sub may be followed by the accusative of direction. It is the
opposite of sur = on.
Place = Under, beneath.
Examples.—La hundo kuris sub la tablon por ekkapti la katon, kiu
kuŝis sub la tablo = The dog ran under the table to seize the cat
that was lying under the table. Muso estas sub la kanapo = A mouse
is under the sofa.
Manner = In, on.
Examples.—Io, sub la formo de kato, transkuris la straton =
Something, in the shape of a cat, ran across the street. Li iris sub
la kondiĉo, ke neniu lin akompanu = He went on (under) the
condition that no one should accompany him.
As a prefix, Subetaĝo = A basement (floor below). Submeti = To
put under, to subdue. Subtegmento = A garret (under roof).
259 (31). Super = Over, above.
May be followed by the accusative of direction. It differs from
sur, since sur generally means that something is upon or touching
something else, whilst super signifies that the object is over or
above something, but not in actual contact.
Place = Over, above, beyond.
Examples.—La balono estis vidata super la urbo = The balloon was
seen over the town. Super mia kapo preterflugis birdo = A bird flew
by, over my head. Li ĵetis ŝtonon super la muron, sed li ne havis
sufiĉe da forto, kaj la ŝtono falis sur la muron = He threw a
stone over the wall, but he had not sufficient (of) strength, and the
stone fell upon (on to) the wall. La spirito de Dio ŝvebis super la
akvo = The Spirit of God moved upon the face of (above) the waters
(water). Mi konas nenion super tio = I know nothing beyond that.
Super is the root of Superi = To surpass. As a prefix,
Superflui = To overflow. Superhoma = Super-human. Supervesto
(or, palto) = An overcoat.
259 (32). Sur = On, upon, on to.
May be followed by the accusative of direction. See remarks on sub
and super. Do not confound sur with super.
Place = On, upon (resting on, touching).
Examples.—Sur lia vizaĝo mi vidis ĝojan rideton = On his face I
saw a joyful smile. Vi trovos la paperojn sur la skribtablo = You
will find the papers on the writing-table. La birdo (sur)flugis
sur la tegmenton = The bird flew on to the roof. Li metis la
ĉapelon sur sian kapon = He put his (the) hat on his head. Li
staris supre sur la monto, kaj rigardis malsupren sur la kampon = He
stood above on the mountain, and looked down (below) upon the field
(note the accusatives of direction, malsupren and kampon). Laŭ
la komando "tri" vi ekpafos sur la arbon = At the command "three"
you will shoot at (on to) the tree.
Dependence = On, to.
Examples.—Tio ĉi povas tre influi sur la sukceson de nia afero =
This can have much influence on the success of our business. Sur la
danan tronon mi havas rajtojn = I have rights on (to) the Danish
throne.
As a prefix, Surmeti = To put on.
259 (33). Tra = Through.
Tra, trans, and preter. The following compound verbs will best
show the meaning of the three prepositions:—
Preterpasi = To pass by, go beyond.
Trapasi = To pass through, to traverse.
Transpasi = To pass over, to cross over.
Example.—Trapasinte la arbaron, li preterpasis la preĝejon, kaj
poste transpasis la riveron per la ponto = Having passed through
(traversed) the wood, he passed by the church, and then crossed the
river by the bridge.
Place = Through, across.
Examples.—Li iris tra la amaso, kaj eniris en la domon = He went
through the crowd and entered the house. Tra la mondo iras forta
voko = Through the world goes a powerful call. Li estas tiel dika,
ke li ne povas trairi tra nia mallarĝa pordo = He is so stout
(thick) that he cannot go through our narrow door.
Adverb: trae = right through.
Occasionally the accusative of direction is used after tra, when
this seems useful for emphasis, or to remove ambiguity.
As a prefix, Tralegi = To read through. Trapasi = To pass
through, to traverse. Traguti = To percolate.
259 (34). Trans = Across; on the other side of, beyond.
May be followed by the accusative of direction.
Place = Across, beyond, on the other side of.
Examples.—La hirundo flugis trans la riveron, ĉar trans la rivero
sin trovis aliaj hirundoj = The swallow flew across the river,
because on the other side of (beyond) the river were (found
themselves) other swallows.
As a prefix, Transiri = To go over, to cross. Transmigri = To
migrate. Transvivi = To outlive, survive (a period of time).
260. English prepositions are used with many various meanings. In
fact, to express the sense of some of those in common use correctly,
five or six or more Esperanto prepositions have to be used to give
the different meanings of one English preposition. For instance,
"by" has five different meanings in the following
expressions:—"He went by the house." "He was hit by a stone."
"By his advice." "Little by little." "He stood by the door."
261. The following common English prepositions are given with their
Esperanto equivalents and examples of their use, viz., "At, by,
for, from, in, of, on, to, with."
At.
261. (a). Represented by:—
Apud, as:—La gefianĉoj staris apud la altaro = The betrothed
stood at the altar.
Ĉe, as:—Ĉe ĉiu paŝo kiun ŝi faris = At every step that she
took. Ŝi estas ĉe la pordo = She is at the door.
De, as:—Li estas mirigita de la lukso de la kortego = He was
astonished at the lŭury of the court.
En, as:—En la unua tempo = At (in) the outset. En Parizo = At
Paris. En la fino = At the end. En la kunveno = At the meeting.
En la interspaco de ... = At the distance of ...
Je, as:—Je la kvara horo = At four o’clock.
Po, as:—Piroj po du pencoj por funto = Pears at (at the rate of)
twopence a (for a) pound.
Por, as:—Por tiu ĉi prezo = At (for) this price.
Pri, as:—Ŝi ridetis pri (je) lia kolero = She smiled at
(about) his anger.
Sur, as:—Ili pafis unu sur la alian = They fired at one another.
Accusative, as:—Ŝi mokadas lian kredemon = She jeers at his
credulity.
Adverb, as:—Tuj = At once. Almenaŭ = At least. Iafoje = At
times. Nune = At present, etc.
By.
261 (b). Represented by:—
Apud, as:—Mi volus stari apud la patrino = I would like to stand
by mother.
Ĉe, as:—Mi tenis lin ĉe la kruro per ŝnurego = I held him by
the leg with a rope.
De, as:—Li estas amata de ĉiuj siaj amikoj = He is loved by all
his friends.
Laŭ, as:—Mi restadas tie ĉi laŭ la konsilo de mia kuracisto =
I am remaining (staying) here by (according to) the advice of my
doctor.
Per, as:—Li eliris el la urbo per flanka vojeto = He left the
town by a by-path.
Post, as:—Iom post iom, ŝi pli trankviliĝis = Little by
(after) little she became more tranquil.
Preter, as:—En tiu momento iris preter ni du sinjorinoj = At
that moment two ladies passed by (beside) us.
Adverb, as:—Legante, ni lernas = By reading, we learn. Tage =
by day. Laŭtage = By the day. Mi staris apude dum li paroladis =
I stood by (near to, close by) whilst he was talking.
For.
261 (c). Represented by:—
Al, as:—Ili ekiris al Berlino (or, Berlinon) = They started
for Berlin.
Anstataŭ, as:—Li skribis trion anstataŭ kvaro = He wrote a
three for (instead of) a four.
De, as:—Tro baldaŭ alvenis la horo de foriro = Too soon came
the hour for (of) departure. De tri semajnoj mi estas malsana = For
three weeks I have been (am) ill.
Dum, as:—Dum la tuta tago li restis sola = For (during) the
whole day he remained alone.
Laŭ, as:—Ŝi estas granda laŭ sia aĝo = She is big for
(according to) her age.
Malgraŭ, as:—Malgraŭ ĉio li ne estis feliĉa = For
(notwithstanding) all that, he was not happy.
Por, as:—Tiu ĉi monujo estas por vi = This purse is for you.
Pri, as:—Li petis lin pri helpo, or, Li petis helpon de li =
He asked him for help. Vi ne devas peti pri tio, kio estas nia
ŝuldo = You have not to beg for that which is our obligation.
Pro, as:—Oni laŭdis lin pro lia boneco = They praised him for
(because of) his goodness. La domo estis vendita pro ŝuldoj = The
house was (had been) sold for debt. Mi volas esti amata pro mi mem,
ne pro mia riĉeco = I want to he loved for myself, not for my
wealth.
Pro tio, ke, as:—Li riproĉis min pro tio, ke mi foriris = He
reproached me for having gone away (lit., because of that that I went
away).
Tra, as:—Li ne povas ĝin porti tra tia interspaco = He cannot
carry it for (through) such a distance.
Accusative, as:—Li restis sola la tutan tagon = He remained
alone all day long (for the whole day) (see the example under
dum).
From.
261 (d). Represented by:—
Al, as:—Ni ne vidas, ĉar la lumo estas kaŝata al ni per la
kurtenoj = We do not see, because the light is hidden from (towards)
us by the curtains.
De, as:—Apartigu la pajlon de la fojno = Separate the straw from
the hay. De tiu tempo = From that time. De lundo ĝis vendredo =
From Monday to Friday.
El, as:—Mi konkludis el lia mieno, ke li estas oficiro = I
concluded from (out of) his appearance that he was (is) an officer.
Kontraŭ, as:—Tie mi estis ŝirmata kontraŭ la vento = There I
was sheltered from (against) the wind.
Laŭ, as:—Tiu ĉi figuro estas skulptita laŭ mia modelo = This
figure is sculptured (carved) from (in accordance with) my model.
Per, as:—Tion mi eksciis per mia frato = I learnt that from (by
means of) my brother.
Pro, as:—Li tremis pro (or, de) timo = He trembled from
(because of) fear.
Sen, as:—Ok sen du estas ses = Two from eight (lit., eight
without two) is six.
In.
261 (e). Represented by:—
Ĉe, as:—Tio donas helpon ĉe la lernado de la vortoj = That
gives help in the learning of the words.
Da, as:—Tri metroj da longo = Three metres in length.
En, as:—Li estas en la domo = He is in the house.
Je, as:—La suna disko ŝajne duobliĝis je grandeco = The sun’s
disc apparently became doubled in size.
Laŭ, as:—Laŭ mia opinio (or, miaopinie) ili estas tute
pravaj = In (according to) my opinion they are quite right. Li
edukiĝis laŭ la timo al Dio = He was brought up in (according to)
the fear of God.
Per, as:—La ambaŭ estis similaj per la vizaĝo kaj la karaktero
= The two were alike in (by means of) features (the face) and (the)
character.
Post, as:—Ni foriros post du aŭ tri tagoj = We are (shall be)
going away in (after) two or three days.
Pri, as:—La instruisto povas pri nenio lin instrui = The teacher
can instruct him in nothing.
Sub, as:—Io, sub la formo de homo, aperas = Something, in
(under) the shape of a man, appears.
Sur, as:—Promenante sur la strato, mi falis = While walking in
(on) the street, I fell.
Accusative, as:—Li estis naskita la vintron de 1902a
= He was born in the winter of 1902.
Adverb, as:—Forme = In shape. Troe = In excess. Vespere = In
the evening. Alivorte = In other words, etc.
Of.
261 (f). Represented by:—
Al, as:—La amo al Dio = The love of (towards) God. Ilia timo al
la morto estas granda = Their fear of (to) death is great. Pro
malamo al mi li foriris = Through hatred of me he went away.
Da, as:—Granda nombro da ideoj = A great number of ideas.
De, as:—La unua vorto de la linio = The first word of the line.
La amo de Dio = The love of (from) God, God’s love.
Dum, as:—Vojaĝo dum dek kvin tagoj, or, Dekkvintaga vojaĝo =
A journey of (during) fifteen days.
El, as:—Unu el ni estos elektata = One of (out of) us will be
chosen. El ĉiuj miaj amikoj, li estas la plej forta = Of (out of)
all my friends, he is the strongest.
En, as:—La plej granda ĉambro en la domo = The largest room of
(in) the house.
Inter, as:—La plej malgranda inter (or, el) ĉiuj arboj en la
ĝardeno = The smallest of (among) all the trees in the garden.
Kun, as:—Ŝi estas virino kun gusto = She is a woman of (with)
taste.
Pri, as:—Ne pensu pri ĝi = Do not think of (about) it. Ŝi
parolis pri sia frato = She spoke of (about) her brother.
Pro, as:—Li mortis pro (or, de) malsato = He died of (owing
to) hunger.
Adjective, as:—Li estas sperta homo = He is a man of experience
(an experienced man).
On.
261 (g). Represented by:—
Al, as:—Peston al la tranĉilo! = Plague on the knife!
Ĉe, as:—Ĉe (or better, sur) la alia flanko de la strato =
On (at) the other side of the street. Ĉe tio mi eliris el la
ĉambro = On that, I left the room.
Ĉirkaŭ, as:—La rado turniĝis ĉirkaŭ sia akso = The wheel
turned on its axis.
De, as:—Ĝi dependas de la nombro de vortoj = It depends on
(from) the number of words.
En, as:—En la tago difinita = On (in) the appointed day.
Je, as:—Mi gratulas vin je (or, pri) via reveno = I
congratulate you on (concerning) your return.
Kun, as:—Ŝi ĝin donis al mi kun (or, sub) tiu kondiĉo =
She gave it me on (with) that condition.
Post, as:—Post plua konsiderado = On (after) further
consideration.
Pri, as:—Li gratulis min pri mia edziĝo = He congratulated me
on (concerning) my marriage.
Pro, as:—Pro tio mi lin lasis = On that account I left him.
Sub, as:—Li vizitis min sub la preteksto, ke li estas parenco =
He visited me on (under) the pretext that he was (is) a relation.
Sur, as:—La paperoj kuŝas sur la tablo = The papers are lying
on the table.
Accusative, as:—Li ĝin donis al mi lundon = He gave it me on a
Monday.
Adjective, as:—La veturilo estas luebla = The carriage is on
hire (is able to be hired).
Adverb, as:—Li staris dekstre = He stood on the right. Li ĝin
faris intence = He did it on purpose. Prunte = On loan.
To.
261 (h). Represented by:—
Al, as:—Mi iras al Parizo = I am going to Paris. Li diris al
mi = He said to me.
En, as:—Li ridetis en si mem = He smiled to (in) himself. Li
reiris en la urbon = He went back to (into) the town.
Ĝis, as:—De sabato ĝis mardo = From Saturday to (till)
Tuesday. Li amis ĝis freneziĝo = He loved to frenzy.
Ke (with a personal pronoun), as:—Vi bone faris, ke vi venis =
You did well to come (that you came).
Kontraŭ, as:—Vizaĝon kontraŭ vizaĝo = Face to (opposite)
face.
Kun, as:—Li fianĉiĝis kun mia kuzino = He became engaged
(affianced) to my cousin.
Por, as:—Mi havas multe (or, multon) por fari = I have much
to do (for to do). Ŝi estis muta por ĉiuj liaj demandoj = She was
dumb to (for) all his questions. Tia agado estas danĝera por ni =
Such action is dangerous to (for) us.
Pri, as:—Pri tio lasu min zorgi = Let me look to that.
Sub, as:—Sub la sono de muziko = To (under) the sound of music.
Sur, as:—Iri sur la kamparon = To go to (into) the country.
Adverb, as:—Li iris dekstren = He went to the right. Morte
kondamnita = Condemned to death.
Accusative, as:—Mi iris Parizon = I went to Paris.
With.
261 (i). Represented by:—
Ĉe, as:—Por esti ĉe li, mi fordonis ĉion = To be with (at)
him, I gave up everything.
De, as:—Li eksaltis de surprizo = He started with (from)
surprise.
El, as:—Kion ni faros el tio? = What shall we do (make) with
(out of) that?
Je, as:—Li okupis sin je (or, pri) meĥaniko = He occupied
himself with (concerning, about) mechanics.
Kontraŭ, as:—Li batalis kontraŭ la malamiko = He fought with
the enemy.
Kun, as:—Li paroladas kun sia amiko = He is conversing (talking)
with (to) his friend.
Laŭ, as:—Li kuris laŭ granda rapideco = He ran with great
rapidity.
Per, as:—Li mortigis sin per glavo = He killed himself with (by
means of) a sword.
Pri, as:—Pri tio mi havas nenion por diri = With regard to
(concerning) that, I have nothing to say.
Sub, as:—Mi ĝin donis al li sub tiu kondiĉo = I gave it to him
with (under) that condition.
Adverb, as:—Rilate vian leteron = With reference to (relating
to) your letter.
262. Conjunctions serve to connect words, phrases, clauses, or
sentences.
Examples.—Somero kaj Vintro = Summer and Winter. Tage aŭ
nokte = By day or by night. Li diras, ke vi estas mallaborema
= He says that you are lazy. Li estas fiera, sed vi estas
humila = He is proud, but you are humble.
263. Conjunctions are of two kinds, Co-ordinating and Subordinating.
They have no influence over the moods of verbs (par. 171 (b)).
264. Co-ordinating conjunctions connect two sentences, or two
members of a sentence that are independent of each other. These are
of five classes:—
- (1). Copulative, as:—kaj = and; kaj ... kaj = both ... and.
- (2). Alternative, as:—aŭ = or; aŭ ... aŭ = either ... or;
nek = nor, nek ... nek = neither ... nor.
- (3). Adversative, as:—sed = but.
- (4). Causative, as:—ĉar = for.
- (5). Illative, as:—tial = therefore.
265. Subordinating conjunctions introduce a clause that is
dependent on another. There are six classes, viz., conjunctions of:—
- (1). Manner or Degree, as:—kiel = as, kvazaŭ = as if, as
though, ol = than, etc.
- (2). Consequence, as:—ke = that, tiel ke = so that.
- (3). Reason or Cause, as:—ĉar = because, since, tial ke =
inasmuch as, since, etc.
- (4). Purpose, as:—timante ke = lest, for fear that, fearing
that, etc.
- (5). Condition, as:—se = if, esceptinte ke, krom se =
unless, except, se nur = provided that, if only, etc.
- (6). Concession, as:—kvankam = though, although, tamen =
however, notwithstanding, eĉ se = even if, etc.
266. Conjunctions connect the same cases of nouns, pronouns, and
adjectives. When there is a diversity of case, it is due to ellipsis
(see par. 105).
Example.—Mi vidis lin kaj lian fraton, sed ne lian fratinon = I
saw him and his brother, but not his sister.
267. The co-ordinating conjunction is sometimes omitted.
Examples.—Li venis, li vidis, li venkis = He came, he saw, he
conquered! Vi iros, Johano restos tie ĉi = You will go, John will
remain here.
268. Conjunctions and adverbs.—Some English words are sometimes
adverbs and sometimes conjunctions, more especially those introducing
clauses of time or place. Some are also prepositions as well as
conjunctions and adverbs, and care must be taken to use the correct
Esperanto words in such cases. For instance, in English "before,"
"after," and "since" are prepositions, adverbs, or conjunctions.
Before (prep.) = Antaŭ.
Example.—Li staris antaŭ la reĝo = He stood before the king.
Before (adv.) = Antaŭe.
Example.—La reĝo neniam lin vidis antaŭe = The king never saw
him before.
Before (conj.) = Antaŭ ol.
Example.—Pripensu antaŭ ol paroli = Reflect before speaking.
After (prep.) = Post, or, malantaŭ.
Example.—Post la hundoj, venis la homoj = After (behind) the dogs
came the men.
After (adv.) = Poste, or, malantaŭe.
Example.—La rajdantoj iris antaŭe, kaj la hundoj venis poste (or,
malantaŭe) = The riders went in advance, and the dogs came after.
After (conj.) = Post kiam, or, kiam.
Example.—Resendu
al mi la libron, post kiam (or, kiam) vi estos ĝin
traleginta = Send me back the book after you (will) have read it
through.
Since (prep.) = De.
Example.—De la kreo de la mondo = Since the creation of the world.
Since (adv.) = De tiu tempo; de tiam; de kiam; de la tempo, kiam.
Example.—Mi lin vidis hieraŭ, sed mi lin ne vidis de tiu tempo =
I saw him yesterday, but I have not seen him since.
Since (conj.) = Ĉar.
Example.—Mi devas ĝin fari, ĉar vi insistas = I must do it,
since you insist.
LIST OF CONJUNCTIONS
(Including Conjunctive Adverbs).
268. (a). The following is a list of the principal conjunctions.
Some of them, according to the sense in which they are used, are
employed also as adverbs or prepositions, and will be found in the
lists of adverbs and prepositions in pars. 248 (b) and 259.
Alie = Otherwise, or, else.
Example.—Mi ne vidis lin, alie mi estus vin sciiginta = I did not
see him, otherwise (else, or) I should have told (informed) you.
Aliflanke = On the other hand.
Example.—Kelkaj personoj diras, ke Johano estas fripono: aliflanke,
aliaj diras, ke li estas naivulo = Some persons say John is a knave;
on the other hand, some say he is a simpleton.
Almenaŭ = At least.
Example.—Almenaŭ li provis ĝin fari = At least he tried to do
it.
Ankaŭ = Also, too, as well (also adverb).
Examples.—Mi ankaŭ ĝin vidis = I, too, saw it. Johano kaj
ankaŭ Mario estis tie = John and also Mary were there.
Antaŭ ol = Before, ere.
Examples.—Antaŭ ol morti, li diris ... = Before dying he said ...
Li vespermanĝis, antaŭ ol li foriris = He dined before he went
away. Antaŭ ol ni atingos lin, li estos malproksime = Ere we
(shall) reach him, he will be far away. Antaŭ ol iri Londonon, ni
veturis Berlinon = Before going to London, we travelled to Berlin.
Aŭ = Or.
Example.—Oni ne scias, ĉu li ploras aŭ ridas = One does not know
whether he is weeping or laughing.
Aŭ ... aŭ = Either ... or.
Example.—Aŭ vi aŭ mi devos ĝin fari = Either you or I must
(will have to) do it.
Cetere = Besides, for the rest, for the matter of that.
Example.—Li ne venis; cetere, se li estus veninta, mi ne estus
vidinta (or, vidus) lin = He did not come; besides, if he had
(should have) come, I should not have seen him.
Ĉar = Because, for, since.
Examples.—Tion mi scias, ĉar tie mi estas = I know that, because
(for) I was there. Ĉar vi ne estis tie, vi ne povas ĝin scii =
Since you were not there, you cannot know it.
Ĉiufoje kiam, ĉiun fojon kiam = Every time when, each time
when.
Example.—Mi lin renkontadis ĉiufoje, kiam mi iris Londonon = I
met him every time (when) I went to London.
Ĉu = Whether, or, if (see remarks on ĉu in the list of
adverbs, par. 248 (b)).
Ĉu ... aŭ = Whether ... or.
Example.—Mi iros, ĉu li venos aŭ ne = I shall go, whether he
come (will come) or not.
Ĉu ... ĉu = Whether ... whether.
Example.—Ĉu li skribos, ĉu li ne skribos, mi ne respondos al li
= Whether he writes, whether he does not write, I shall not reply to
him.
De l’ tempo kiam, or, de kiam = Since, from the time when.
Example.—De l’ tempo kiam li mortis.... = Since he died....
Des pli = So much the. Des pli is generally used with Ju pli
(which see), but sometimes alone in reply to questions (par. 112).
Example.—Mi devas averti vin, ke li eble ne estos hejme = I must
warn you, that perhaps he will not be (or, that he may not be) at
home. Des pli bone! mi tute ne deziras lin vidi = So much the
better, I don’t at all wish to see him.
Do = Then, therefore, consequently (argumentative).
Examples.—Mi do povas dormi trankvile = Then I can sleep
tranquilly. Estis do vidaĵo mirinda! = It was then a wonderful
sight! Kion do Johano diros? = What then will John say?
Dum (also preposition) = While, whilst (par. 259 (10)).
Examples.—Dum li estis parolanta, ni eliris el la ĉambro = Whilst
he was speaking, we went out of the room. Li povas labori, dum mi
estas for = He can work, whilst I am away.
Dume = Meantime, meanwhile (also adverb).
Example.—Ili ekbruligis la fajron, dume ni pretigis la manĝaĵon
= They lighted the fire, meanwhile we got the food ready.
Eĉ se = Even if.
Example.—Ili ne volus iri, eĉ se ili estus invititaj = They would
not wish to go, even if they were (should be) invited.
Foje kiam = Once when, one day when, once upon a time.
Example.—Foje kiam mi promenis, mi renkontis vian amikon = Once
(one day), when walking, I met your friend.
Ĝis (also preposition) = Till, until (par. 259 (13)).
Example.—Atendu, ĝis mi revenos[22] = Wait till I (shall) return.
Jen = Behold, here (also an adverb and interjection).
Example.—Jen la malsameco de la rezulto klariĝas = Here the
difference of the result is explained.
Jen ... jen = Now ... now, sometimes ... at other times.
Example.—Jen li kuras rapide, jen li haltas! = Now he runs
rapidly, now he stops!
Ju malpli ... des malpli = The less ... the less (par. 112).
Example.—Ju malpli li laboras, des malpli li enspezas = The less
he works, the less he earns.
Ju malpli ... des pli = The less ... the more.
Example.—Ju malpli li trinkas, des pli li manĝas = The less he
drinks, the more he eats.
Ju pli ... des malpli = The more ... the less.
Example.—Ju pli ni trinkas, des malpli ni manĝas = The more we
drink, the less we eat.
Ju pli ... des pli = The more ... the more.
Example.—Ju pli bona vi estos, des pli vi estos amata = The better
you are, the more you will be loved.
Kaj = And.
Example.—Vi kaj mi devas ĝin fari = You and I must do it.
Kaj ... kaj = Both ... and.
Example.—Mi vidis tie kaj Johanon kaj Georgon = I saw both John
and George there.
Kaj ceteraj = And the rest, et cetera (commonly written k.c.).
Kaj tiel plu = And so forth, and so on (commonly written
k.t.p.).
Ke = That. Be careful not to use ke for the pronouns kio,
kiu, tio, or tiu = that.
Examples.—Mi esperas, ke tio, kion vi havas en la mano, ne estas
venena insekto = I hope that that which you have in your (the) hand
is not a poisonous insect. Mi pensas, ke tiu vorto estas malĝuste
tradukita = I think that that word is wrongly translated.
Kial = Wherefore, why (par. 150) (also adverb).
Example.—Demandu lin, kial li tion faras = Ask him why he does
that.
Kiam = When, as, after (kiam = after, when used with the
English pluperfect) (par. 151).
Examples.—Pluvis forte, kiam ni atingis (alproksimiĝis) la
lagon = It rained heavily when (as) we reached the lake. Kiam mi
estis kolektinta la sumon, mi aĉetis novan libron = After (when) I
had collected the amount, I bought a new book.
Kiam ajn = Whenever (par. 145).
Example.—Li balbutis, kiam ajn li parolis = He stammered whenever
he spoke.
Kie = Where (par. 152) (also adverb).
Example.—Sciigu min, kie li estas = Tell (inform) me where he is.
Kie ajn = Wherever (par. 145).
Example.—Mi lin trovos, kie ajn li estas = I shall find him
wherever he is.
Kiel = As (in comparison) (par. 153).
Example.—Li estas tiel forta, kiel vi = He is as strong as you.
Kiel ajn malmulte = However little.
Example.—Kiel ajn malmulte vi volos (or, volas) ... = However
little you may (will) wish....
Kiel ankaŭ = As also, as well as.
Example.—Mia patro, kiel ankaŭ mi, pensas, ke.... = My father, as
well as I, thinks that....
Kiel eble plej baldaŭ = As soon as possible (lit., as possible,
most soon). Kiel eble plej should be used as follows:—
Examples.—Kiel eble plej frue = As early as possible. Kiel eble
plej rapide = As quickly as possible. Sendu lin al mi kiel eble
plej baldaŭ = Send him to me as soon as possible.
Kiel ekzemple = As for example.
Example.—Oni ne manĝas kelkajn birdojn, kiel ekzemple aglojn,
akcipitrojn, vulturojn, cikoniojn, kaj aliajn = People do not eat
some birds, as, for example, eagles, hawks, vultures, storks, and
others.
Kio ajn okazos (or, ĉiuokaze) = At all events (lit., whatever
shall happen).
Example.—Mi venos morgaŭ, kio ajn okazos = I shall come to-morrow
whatever happens.
Kondiĉe, ke = On condition that.
Example.—Mi vin forpermesos, kondiĉe, ke vi revenu postmorgaŭ =
I will give you leave of absence, on condition that you return the
day after to-morrow.
Konsente, ke = It being agreed that.
Example.—Mi iros, konsente, ke vi ankaŭ estu tie = I will go, it
being understood that (agreed that) you also be there.
Kontraŭe = On the contrary (also adverb).
Example.—Vi preferas la bovaĵon, mi, kontraŭe, preferas la
ŝafaĵon = You prefer beef, I, on the contrary, prefer mutton.
Krom se = Unless.
Examples.—Krom se ili rapidos (or, se ili ne rapidos), ili
maltrafos la vagonaron = Unless they (will) make haste, they will
miss the train.
Krom tio = Besides, moreover, apart from that.
Example.—Ŝi estis krom tio tre bela knabino = She was, besides
(moreover), a very beautiful girl.
Kun la kondiĉo, ke = On (with) the condition that.
Example.—Mi pruntis al li la libron kun la kondiĉo, ke li redonu
ĝin al mi postmorgaŭ = I lent him the book on the condition that
he should (is to) return it to me the day after to-morrow.
Kvankam = Although, though.
Examples.—Kvankam li estas riĉa, tamen li ne estas feliĉa =
Although he is rich, yet he is not happy. Kvankam mi konsentas vian
opinion, tamen mi ne povas akordiĝi kun vi = Though I agree with
your opinion, I cannot nevertheless be in accord with you.
Kvazaŭ = As if, as though (also adverb).
Example.—Li staris, kvazaŭ li vidas teruraĵon = He stood as if
he saw a terrible object.
Laŭ tio ... ke = According as.
Example.—Laŭ tio, ke vi estos atenta aŭ maldiligenta, la
lernejestroj vin laŭdos aŭ mallaŭdos = According as you are (will
be) attentive or idle, the schoolmaster will praise or blame you.
Malgraŭ ĉio = In spite of all (everything), after all.
Example.—Li foriris malgraŭ ĉio, kion mi diris = He went away in
spite of all I said.
Malgraŭ tio, ke = Notwithstanding that.
Example.—Malgraŭ tio, ke mi ne havis palton, mi eliris =
Notwithstanding that I had no overcoat, I went out.
Malpli ... ol = Less ... than (par. 112).
Example.—Li estas malpli kuraĝa, ol lia frato = He is less
courageous than his brother.
Ne nur, ne sole = Not only.
Example.—Li ne nur ŝtelis, sed li mortigis ankaŭ = He not only
stole, but he committed murder (murdered) also.
Nek = Nor (par. 59 (c)).
Example.—Li ne estis tie, nek mi = He was not there, nor I.
Nek ... ankaŭ = Nor ... also, nor ... too, nor ... either.
Example.—Vi ne estis tie, nek mi ankaŭ = You were not there, nor
I either.
Nek ... nek = Neither ... nor (par. 59 (c)).
Example.—Nek vi nek mi estis tie = Neither you nor I was there.
Ol = Than (par. 112).
Examples.—Pli bone malfrue, ol neniam = Better
late than never. La libro ne kostos pli ol tri ŝilingojn = The
book will not cost more than three shillings.
Per (or, pro) tio, ke = In that, since.
Example.—La akvo diferencas de la glacio per tio, ke tiu estas
fluida, kaj ĉi tiu malfluida = Water differs from ice, in that the
former is fluid and the latter solid.
Pli ... ol = More ... than (par. 112).
Example.—Li estas pli forta, ol vi = He is stronger than you.
Plie = Moreover, further (also adverb).
Example.—Plie, mi diras al vi, ke ... = Moreover, I tell you
that....
Por ke = In order that, so that, to the end that. Por ke is
always followed by the Imperative mood, because, when used, this
expression implies order (see remarks on Imperative, par. 201).
Examples.—Por ke mi rekompencu vin, konvenas, ke vi ĝin meritu =
In order that I may recompense you, it is proper (fitting) that you
merit it. Mi volas ĉion fari, por ke vi estu kontenta je mi = I
wish to do everything, so that you may be satisfied with me, or, I
will do everything to please you.
Post kiam = After.
Example.—Post kiam la suno subiris, ni revenis hejmen = After the
sun set we returned home.
Same kiel = As, just as (par. 112).
Example.—Same kiel la patrino amas sian infanon, tiel mi amas vin
= Just as the mother loves her child, so do I love you.
Se = If.
Example.—Mi ĝin faros, se mi povos = I shall do it if I can
(shall be able).
Se ne = If not, otherwise, lest.
Example.—Lernu vian lecionon, se ne, mi vin vergos! = Learn your
lesson, otherwise I shall cane you!
Se nur = If only, provided that.
Example.—Vi vidos Johanon, se nur vi alvenos frue = You will see
John, provided that you (will) arrive early.
Se okaze = If perchance, in case, in the event of.
Example.—Se okaze vi venus malfrue, Johano ne estus tie ĉi = If
perchance you should come late, John would not be here.
Se tamen = If however, if still, if though, if
notwithstanding.
Example.—Se tamen vi ne povos veni morgaŭ matene, venu vespere =
If, however, you are not (will not be) able to come to-morrow
morning, come in the evening.
Sed = But.
Example.—Li legas, sed ne komprenas tion, kion li legas = He
reads, but does not understand what he reads.
Sed ankaŭ = But also.
Example.—Ŝi donis al mi ne nur hundon, sed ankaŭ ĉevalon = She
gave me not only a dog, but also a horse.
Sed eĉ = But even.
Example.—Ne sole viroj, sed eĉ infanoj estis tie = Not only men,
but even children were there.
Sekve = Consequently.
Example.—Ekpluvis, sekve ni revenis domen = It began to rain,
consequently we returned home.
Tamen = However, yet, still, nevertheless, but.
Examples.—Kvankam li estas riĉa, tamen li ne estas feliĉa =
Although he is rich, yet (still) he is not happy. Mi ne povis veni
hodiaŭ, tamen mi venos morgaŭ = I could not come to-day, however,
I will come to-morrow. Kvankam li perdis monon, tamen li ne mortis
malriĉulo = Although he lost money, nevertheless he did not die a
poor man.
Tia, ke = Such that.
Example.—Mia teruro estis tia, ke mi ne povis paroli unu vorton =
My terror was such, that I could not utter a single word.
Tial = So, therefore (par. 150) (also adverb).
Example.—Li rifuzis labori, tial mi eksigis lin = He refused to
work, therefore (so) I dismissed him.
Tial, ke = Inasmuch as, since, because.
Example.—Mi vin ne mallaŭdas, tial, ke tio ne estis
via eraro = I do not blame you, inasmuch as (since) it (that) was
not your mistake.
N.B.—Do not confuse tial, ke with tiel, ke = so that.
Tiam, kiam = Then when, when (par. 151).
Example.—Tiam, kiam mi estis riĉa, mi ne estis feliĉa, or, Kiam
mi estis riĉa, (tiam) mi ne estis feliĉa = When I was rich,
(then) I was not happy.
Tiamaniere, ke = In such a manner that, so that.
Example.—Parolu tiamaniere (or, tiel), ke mi povu vin kompreni
= Speak in such a manner (so) that I can (may be able to) understand
you.
Tiel, ke = So that.
Example.—Estis muro inter ili, tiel, ke ili ne povis vidi unu la
alian = There was a wall between them so that they could not see one
another.
Tiel ... ke = So ... that.
Example.—Li estas tiel bona, ke li ĉion pardonas = He is so good
that he pardons everything.
Tiel ... kiel = As ... as (par. 112).
Example.—Ŝi estas tiel bona, kiel (ŝi estas) bela = She is
as good as she is beautiful.
Timante, ke, or, pro la timo, ke = For fear that, fearing
that, lest.
Example.—Mi tion diris, timante, ke li venos = I said that,
fearing that (lest) he would (will) come. Note the use of the future
tense here. "What is my fear?" I fear he will perhaps come.
Tio estas (t.e.) = That is, that is to say, to wit. The
initial letters are nearly always used just as we say id est =
i.e.
Tiom ... ke = So many ... that, so much ... that.
Example.—Mi havis tiom da pomoj, ke mi devis ilin fordoni = I had
so many apples that I was obliged to give them away.
Tiom ... kiom = As much ... as, as many ... as.
Example.—Donu al mi tiom, kiom vi povas = Give me as much (many)
as you can.
Tuj kiam = As soon as, immediately when, directly.
Example.—Mi fermis la pordon, tuj kiam li eliris = I shut the door
as soon as (directly) he went out.
269. Interjections (interjekcioj) and interjectional expressions
vary so considerably in force and meaning in different languages that
it is impossible to translate some of them. If we translated our
English interjections literally into Esperanto, many of them would
have no meaning to a foreigner. The following short list appears at
present to be in use, but, no doubt, as the language becomes more
widely spoken, more will be added.
Adiaŭ! = Adieu! farewell! good-bye!
Ah! Aha! = Ah! hah!
Aj! = An exclamation of disgust.
Antaŭen! = Forward!
Atentu! = Look out! Take care! Attention!
Aŭskultu! = Hark! hist!
Bis! = Encore!
Bone! = Good!
Bonvenu! Bonvenon! = Welcome!
Brave! = Bravo! capital! splendid!
Certe! = Certainly!
Ĉu estas eble! = Is it possible!
Ĉu ne! = Isn’t it! etc. Ĉu! = Is it! etc.
Ĉu ne vere! = Is it not so!
Dio gardu! = God save us!
Dio mia! = God bless me!
Dio min savu! = God save me!
Dio volu! = Would to God! may God!
Efektive! = Really!
Fi! = Fie! for shame!
For! = Away! be off!
For de tie ĉi! = Begone! be off! avaunt!
Ha! = Ah! ha!
Haltu! = Stop!
He! = Halloo! hey!
Helpon! Helpu! = Help!
Ho! = O! oh! ho!
Ho ve! = Alack! alas! oh dear! welladay!
Hontu! = For shame!
Hura! = Hurrah! huzza!
Ja! = Indeed!
Jen! = Lo! there! behold! see!
Kial do! = Why indeed! why then!
Kiel abomene! = How abominable!
Kion! = What! Kion do! = What then!
Kompreneble! = Of course!
Kuraĝe! = Courage!
Ne! = No!
Nu! = Well!
Nu do! = Well then!
Pacience! Paciencu! Paciencon! = Be quiet! Patience!
Peston! = Plague on’t!
Pluen! Daŭrigu! = Proceed! Go on!
Pro Dio! = For God’s sake!
Rapidu! Rapide! = Quick!
Silentu! Silenton! = Hist! hush!
Ŝŝ! = ’Sh! Hush!
Ts! = Hist!
Ve! = Woe!
Vere! = Really! True!
Verege! Tre vere! = Very true!
Vivu! = Long live!
269 (a). When adjectives are used as interjections, the adverbial
form in E is used, because there is neither noun nor pronoun with
which they can agree, as:—Neeble! = Impossible! (par. 245).
270. Suffix -AĈ-. Prefixes FI- and FUŜ-.
The suffix -aĉ- denotes badness of quality or condition, and is
used with any part of speech to show disparagement, contempt.
Fuŝi, to botch, bungle, do blunderingly, is sometimes used
as a prefix with a similar meaning, though it is less frequently used
than -aĉ.
Aĉa = nasty; domaĉo = a hovel; veteraĉo = vile
weather; ĉapelaĉo = a shabby hat; fuŝkonstrui, or,
konstruaĉi = to jerry-build.
The exclamation Fi = fie! for shame! is used as a prefix to
denote shamefulness, disgustingness, nastiness. Fi- denotes
moral rather than physical badness, and is stronger than -aĉ-,
which has a more general sense.
Fidomo = a house of ill repute; fivorto = a naughty word;
firakonto = a low story.
270 (1). Suffix -AD-. (Ex. 19.)
(a). This suffix marks that an action is being continued or is
habitual. It marks an action of some duration, not momentary. Thus,
pafo = a shot from a gun (the gun is fired, and the action is
over); but pafado = a fusillade (a continuance of shots of more
or less duration).
Thus dancado = dancing, desegnado = designing, drawing, kantado
= singing, legado = reading, pentrado = painting, skulptado =
(the art of) sculpture, skribado = writing. These words signify not
momentary acts, but habitual actions; in fact, they are used to
denote arts or practices, as the art of painting, singing, etc.
Kanto = A song. Ŝia kanto plaĉas al mi = Her song pleases me.
Ŝia kantado ĉarmas min = Her singing charms me.
(b). If we wish to speak of the faculties of hearing, smelling,
touching, thought, feeling, will, we say aŭdado, flarado,
palpado, pensado, sentado, volado; but if we speak of
isolated acts of such faculties, we say aŭdo, flaro, palpo,
penso, sento, volo.
(c). Sometimes the word arto is used when we wish to specify that
some -ado is an art.
Examples.—Danc-arto (dancado) = the art of dancing, kant-arto
(kantado) = the art of singing, pentr-arto (pentrado) = the art
of painting.
N.B.—The hyphens are not necessary.
(d). The difference in meaning of words with and without the suffix
is seen in such words as:—
Movo = a motion, movado = movement (general), progreso = a step
of progress, progresado = progress (general), parolo = word
(spoken), parolado = speech, discourse, fumo = smoke, fumado =
smoking (habit of smoking), verko = a work (literary or musical),
verkado = composition (lit.).
(e). In the verb itself we use this suffix to show that the action
is not merely momentary, but is being continued, repeated, or is
habitual; an aspect of the verb which is, in English, often
expressed by the words "keep on," "used to," etc.
Examples.—Mi saltadis la tutan tagon de loko al loko = I jumped
(about) all day long from place to place (kept on jumping). Viziti
= To visit. Vizitadi = To frequent, to haunt.
(f). Where the root plus o denotes the name of an object, the
ending -ado introduces the idea of action, thus: krono = a
crown; kronado = coronation; martelo = a hammer; martelado
= hammering, etc.
(g). Do not therefore use -AD- without thinking of its
significance, or merely for the sake of euphony.
271. Suffixes -AĴ- and -EC-. (Ex. 20).
(a). -AĴ- denotes something having the quality denoted by the
root, or made or derived from that which is named by the root. It is
also used to denote the flesh of animals intended for food.
Examples.—Ĉasi = to hunt, ĉasaĵo = game. Armi = to arm,
armaĵo = armour. Bovo = an ox, bovaĵo = beef. Ovo = an egg,
ovaĵo = an omelet.
(b). -EC- denotes an abstract quality, similar to the English
suffixes, -nce, -ncy, -ness, -tude, -ity.
Examples.—Pura = clean, pureco = purity, cleanness. Feliĉa =
happy, feliĉeco = happiness, felicity. Sen = without, seneco =
dearth, want. Kuraĝa = courageous, kuraĝeco = fortitude.
Danki = to thank, dankeco = gratitude, thankfulness. Riĉa =
rich, riĉeco = wealth.
(c). Both suffixes apply to good or bad qualities. They can be used
as roots, as aĵo = a thing, eco = a quality, a distinctive
mark.
(d). A comparison of the following words will best illustrate their
meaning.
Amiko = a friend, amikaĵo = a friendly act, amikeco =
friendship. Bona = good, bonaĵo = a good (action or thing),
boneco = goodness. Fortika = solid, robust, fortikaĵo = a
stronghold, fortikeco = robustness. Mola = soft, molaĵo = a
soft substance, pulp, moleco = softness. Sprita = witty,
spritaĵo = a witticism, spriteco = wittiness. Malsprita =
dull, stupid, malspritaĵo = a stupidity, a bêtise, malspriteco
= stupidity, a state of silliness.
(e). To express an idea itself, namely, one that is
neither concrete (-AĴ-) nor abstract (-EC-), we add
only the grammatical termination to the root. For instance, la
bono = the good, good (itself), and from this
arises bonaĵo = a good action, or, something
good, the abstract quality being boneco = goodness.
Again, acido = an acid, acidaĵo = an acid
thing, something which has an acid taste, acideco =
acidity. So, heroo = a hero, heroaĵo =
an exploit (something heroic), heroeco = heroism.
The student should guard against the tendency of some writers to
over-use -ec-: e.g., to use feliĉeco, kuraĝeco,
boneco, rapideca, in cases where the sense does not call
for a qualitative suffix, and simple feliĉo, kuraĝo,
bono, rapida, would be more appropriate. In other words,
use eco only when you wish to accentuate the abstractness, the
"nessness" of the idea.
Examples.—La bono, kiun vi faras estas rimarkinda, ĉar via boneco
ĉiam instigadas vin fari bonaĵojn = The good that you are doing is
remarkable, for your goodness is always prompting you to do kind
acts. Vitriolo estas acido, sed vinagro estas nur acidaĵo, kvankam
ambaŭ posedas acidecon = Vitriol is an acid, but vinegar is only a
sour fluid, although both possess acidity. La heroo de la heroaĵo
montris grandan heroecon = The hero of the exploit showed great
heroism. La amiko montras sian amikecon per amikaĵoj = A friend
shows his friendship by friendly acts.
272. Suffixes -AN-, -IST-, -ESTR-, -UL-. (Ex. 21).
These four suffixes relate to individuals. When combined with a root,
one or other of them serves to show a person’s country, religion,
profession, occupation, character, etc. Each has its distinct
meaning, and care must be taken not to confuse them. The feminine
suffix -IN- is added to denote females.
(a). Like the English -an, -man, -AN- denotes a member of
something, such as a club, society, etc.; an inhabitant of a place or
country; a partisan; an adherent to a party, faction, religion, etc.
Examples.—Klubo = a club, klubano = a member of a club. Senato
= senate, senatano = a senator. Ameriko = America, amerikano =
an American. Londono = London, londonano = a Londoner. Parizo =
Paris, parizano = a Parisian. Urbo = a town or city, urbano = a
townsman or citizen. Kamparo = country (rural), kamparano = a
countryman. Vilaĝo = a village, vilaĝano = a villager. Insulo
= an island, insulano = an islander. Kristo = Christ, Kristano = a
Christian. Partio = a party, partiano = a partisan.
(b). The suffix -AN- itself is used as a root. Ano = a
member, anaro = a band (a collection of members of something).
(c). -IST-, like the English affix -ist, denotes a person
following a profession or trade, or some occupation by which he gains
his livelihood, or who is habitually engaged in science, art, etc. In
short, it denotes habitual occupation (not necessarily for the sake
of gain).
Examples.—Juĝi = to judge, juĝisto = a judge. Kuraci = to
treat the sick, kuracisto = a doctor. Drogo = a drug, drogisto
= a druggist. Maro = sea, maristo = a sailor (by occupation).
Rabi = to rob, rabisto = a robber. Ŝteli = to steal,
ŝtelisto = a thief. Pentri = to paint, pentristo = a painter
(art). Kolorigi = to colour, paint, kolorigisto = a painter
(house). Servi = to serve, servisto or servistino = servant
(male or female). Astrologio = astrology, astrologiisto (or,
astrologo) = an astrologer.
(d). -IST- is used only when there is a root to which it may be
added to form the name of someone engaged in a trade, occupation,
etc., as shown in the above examples. Thus, from Kudri = to sew,
ŝuo = a shoe, boto = boot, we get kudristino = a
seamstress or dressmaker, ŝuisto = a shoemaker, botisto =
a bootmaker. When there is no such root, Esperanto provides an
independent root, as:—Tajloro = a tailor, lakeo = a lackey,
or valet.
(e). When the person is engaged in a temporary occupation, or is
not a professional, but an amateur, a participle is often used.
Examples.—Juĝanto = a judge (of something), juĝisto, a judge
(by occupation or profession). Amanto = a lover, amisto = a
lover, a sweetheart, a gallant. Fotografanto = a photographer, one
who is now photographing, fotografisto = a professional
photographer. Laboranto = a person working, laboristo = a
labourer, or man who works for a livelihood.
(f). -ESTR- denotes a person who is a chief, leader, ruler,
principal, or head of a State, party, body, etc. In the same way as
the suffix -AN- denotes a member of some profession, body, etc., so
-ESTR- would designate the head of it, as:—Urbo = a city,
urbano = citizen, urbestro = a mayor, a chief citizen.
Examples.—Imperio = an empire, imperiestro = an emperor,
imperiestrino = an empress. Regno = (the) State, regnestro = a
ruler, head of (the) State. Ŝipo = a ship, ŝipestro = a captain
of a merchant vessel, a skipper. Lernejo = a school, lernejestro
= a schoolmaster, head master (a teacher would be instruisto). From
polico = police, we get policano = a policeman (a member of the
police force), policisto = an officer of police (one who has made
the police his profession), policestro = chief of police.
(g). Ĉefo = chief, head, is used as a prefix as an
equivalent of the English chief, main, head-, prime.
Examples.—Episkopo = a bishop, ĉefepiskopo = archbishop.
Anĝelo = an angel, ĉefanĝelo = archangel.
Compare -estro (the one in command over) with ĉef- (principal in
honour, in comparison with the others). Ĉefŝipo = principal
ship, ŝipestro = ship’s captain.
(h). -UL- denotes a person characterized by the idea contained in
the root, the root being used in an adjectival sense to express that
an individual is "rich," "poor," "just," "good," etc.
Examples.—Riĉa = rich, riĉulo = a rich man. Malriĉa = poor,
malriĉulo = a poor man, a pauper. Justa = just, justulo = a
just or righteous man. Bona = good, bonulo = a good man. Bela =
beautiful, belulino = a beauty, a beautiful woman. Paca =
peaceful, paculo = a man of peace. Juna = young, junulo = a
youth, junulino = a young woman. Avara = avaricious, avarulo = a
miser.
(i). Primary words can be used also as roots when applicable.
Examples.—Tie = there, tieulo = an aborigine (a man of there).
Tiam = then, at that time, tiamulo = a contemporary (a man of
that time). Kun = with, kunulo = a companion (a person with you).
(j). Since words like legi = to read, viziti = to visit,
etc., are not adjectival in character, we use with them (in
describing a person) by preference not -UL- but -IST- or a
participial termination.
Examples.—Leganto = a reader (who is reading), leginto = a
reader (who has read), legonto = a reader (who is about to read),
legisto = a reader (by habitual occupation). But legemulo = a
person who is fond of reading.
273. Suffixes -AR- and -ER-. (Ex. 22.)
Aro = a collection, and ero = an item; therefore aro da
eroj might be termed "a collection of items."
(a). -AR- denotes a reunion or a collection of the idea contained
in the root; a whole formed from a union of the parts.
Examples.—Vorto = a word, vortaro = a collection of words, a
dictionary. Homo = a man, homaro = mankind. Arbo = a tree,
arbaro = a wood, arbareto = a small wood, clump of trees.
Arbeto = shrub, small tree, arbetaro = shrubbery, a grove.
Insulo = an island, insularo = an archipelago. Vagono = a
(railway) carriage, vagonaro = a train. Sekvanto = a follower,
sekvantaro = suite, cortège, retinue. Nomo = a name, nomaro =
list of names, a register. Ŝtupo = a step, ŝtuparo = a
staircase, ŝtupetaro = a ladder, succession of small steps.
Aristokrato = an aristocrat, aristokrataro = (the) aristocracy.
Aro = a collection, a flock, a herd. If we wish to specify the
animals, we can add the suffix to the name, as:—Bruto = cattle,
brutaro = a herd of cattle. Ŝafo = a sheep, ŝafaro = a flock
of sheep. Abelo = a bee, abelaro = a swarm of bees.
(b). -ER- denotes one of many objects of the same kind, a small
fragment, one of many similar parts which together form the whole.
Examples.—Sablo = sand, sablero = a grain of sand. Hajlo =
hail, hajlero = a hailstone. Fajro = fire, fajrero = a spark.
Mono = money, monero = a coin. Polvo = dust, polvero = an
atom or speck of dust. Pulvo = gunpowder, pulvero = a grain of
gunpowder. Sukero = sugar, sukerero = a grain of sugar.
274. Suffixes -ĈJ- and -NJ-. (Ex. 23.)
(a). -ĈJ- is an affectionate diminutive to the Christian name of
a man. It is placed after any letter of the name not later than the
fifth (occasionally, the sixth).
Examples.—Vilhelmo = William, Vilhelĉjo = Willie, Vilheĉjo =
Will, Vilĉjo = Billy, Viĉjo = Bill. Petro = Peter, Peĉjo =
Pete. Johano = John, Johanĉjo = Johnnie, Joĉjo = Jack.
Nikolao = Nicholas, Nikolĉjo = Nickie, Nikoĉjo, Nikĉjo, or
Niĉjo = Nick. Ernesto = Ernest, Erneĉjo, Ernĉjo, or
Erĉjo = Ernie. Patro = father, patreto, paĉjo = papa.
(b). -NJ- is a similar diminutive for a female Christian name.
Examples.—Mario = Mary, Marinjo = Molly, Manjo = Polly.
Klaro = Clara, Klanjo = Clarrie. Sofio = Sophia, Sonjo =
Sophy. Patrineto, patrinjo, panjo = mamma, mammy, ma.
275. Suffixes -EBL-, -EM-, -IND-. (Ex. 24.)
(a). These three suffixes, when used as roots, form the words
ebla = possible; emo = propensity, tendency; indo =
worth, merit, value. As suffixes they are mostly used to form
adjectives or adverbs, and the following three, from kredi = to
believe, will give an idea of their different shades of meaning.
Kredebla = credible, possible of belief, believable;
kredema = credulous, having a tendency to believe; kredinda =
worthy of belief.
(b). -EBL- denotes possibility, or what is likely to happen,
similar to the English suffix -able, -ible.
Examples.—Pagi = to pay, pagebla = payable. Fleksi = to bend,
fleksebla = flexible. Rompi = to break, rompebla = breakable.
Fidi = to rely upon, fidebla = reliable. Kompreni = to
understand, komprenebla = comprehensible, kompreneble = of
course, comprehensibly.
(c). Do not confuse -EBL- with -EM- or -IND- in words which
in English end in -able or -ible, but have two distinct meanings.
For instance, "readable" may mean either "able to be read" or "worth
reading." In Esperanto there is no such confusion, for legebla =
readable, legible, but leginda = readable, worth reading.
Hence we see that -EBL- must always denote possibility. It is
possible to love or to honour all persons, whether they merit this or
not; but when, in English, we talk of a lovable or honourable
individual, we imply not possibility, but worthiness; therefore, in
Esperanto, aminda = lovable, and honorinda = honourable.
-EBL- is sometimes used for the infinitive.
Examples.—Tiuj ĉi vortoj ne estas troveblaj en la vortaro = These
words are not to be found (findable) in the dictionary. Tia amo
estas malfacile imagebla = It is difficult to imagine such love.
(d). -EM- denotes propensity, tendency, inclination, disposition,
similar to the English suffix, -ful.
Examples.—Paco = peace, pacema = peaceful. Helpi = to help,
helpema = helpful, obliging. Trompi = to deceive, trompema =
deceitful, trompemo = duplicity. Servi = to serve, servema =
obliging, servemo = inclination to serve. Labori = to work,
laborema = laborious. Pura = clean, pure, purema = cleanly,
purigebla = cleanable. Babili = to chatter, babilema =
talkative, chattering. Koleri = to be angry, kolerema =
irascible, ekkolerema = quick-tempered. Dormi = to sleep,
dormema = disposed to sleep, sleepy, drowsy.
(e). Do not confuse -EM- with -IND- (or with -AM- (love) in
compound words). For instance:—
Envii = to envy, enviema = envious, inclined to envy, enviinda
= enviable, worthy or deserving of envy. Honti = to be ashamed,
hontema = bashful, inclined to be ashamed, hontemo = bashfulness,
hontinda = shameful, deserving of shame, impudent. Dormi = to
sleep, dormema = drowsy, dormama = fond of sleep.
(f). -IND- denotes worthiness, worthy of.
Examples.—Inda = worthy, malinda = unworthy. Laŭdi = to
praise, laŭdinda = praiseworthy. Memori = to remember,
memorinda = memorable, worthy of being remembered. Estimi = to
esteem, estiminda = esteemable, or estimable. If we use "estimable"
in the sense of "able to be valued," we must form the word from
taksi = to estimate, to value, taksebla = estimable, appraisable.
276. Suffix -EDZ-. (Exs. 25, 34.)
-EDZ- denotes a married person, and can scarcely be called a
suffix, although classed as such, since it is generally used as a
root.
Examples.—Edzo = a husband, a married man, edzino = a wife, a
married woman, edzeco = matrimony, a state of marriage, edziĝo =
a wedding, nuptials, edziĝa = nuptial, geedzoj = a married
couple, husband and wife.
When reference is made to a woman, the feminine suffix -IN- is
added to verbs as well as nouns and adjectives.
Examples.—Doktoredzino = a doctor’s wife; kudristinedzo = a
seamstress’s husband; laboristedzino = a labourer’s wife;
lavistinedzo = a washerwoman’s husband; tajloredzino = a tailor’s
wife; edzigi (trans.) = to marry a couple, or to marry (a man to a
woman), edzinigi (trans.) = to marry a woman to a man; edziĝi
(intrans.) = to get (to be) married (man), edziniĝi (intrans.) =
to get (to be) married (woman). Note the following sentences:—Li
edziĝis kun sia kuzino, kvankam liaj gepatroj volis edzigi lin kun
alia sinjorino = He was married to (with) his cousin, although his
parents wished to marry him to (with) another lady. Ŝi edziniĝis
kun sia kuzo, kvankam ŝiaj gepatroj volis edzinigi ŝin kun alia
sinjoro = She was married to her cousin, although her parents wished
to marry her to another gentleman.
277. Suffixes -EG- and -ET-. (Ex. 26.)
(a). These two suffixes are opposites, -EG-
denoting augmentation, and -ET- diminution of degree. When
employed in adjectives, the adverb "very" is often loosely used to
denote the degree, as:—Grandega (very large),
malgrandega (very little), but a better translation
of these words is grandega = huge, enormous;
malgrandega = tiny (see remarks on degrees of intensity
of adjectives, par. 114). If we cannot find English adjectives as
equivalents of -EG- or -ET-, we should use not the adverb
"very," but a stronger term, as "excessively," "enormously," etc.
(b). In the case of nouns we must be careful to use the right words
to express the English meaning.
Examples.—Montego = a huge mountain, granda monto = a big
mountain, monto = a mountain, malgranda monto = a small mountain,
monteto = a hill, altaĵo = an eminence, altaĵeto = a hillock.
Again:—Riverego = a huge river, larĝa rivero = a wide river,
rivero = a river, malgranda rivero = a small river, rivereto =
a brook, stream, malgranda rivereto = a streamlet.
(c). -EG- denotes augmentation, intensity of degree. Used as a
root, ega = intense, egeco = intensity.
(d). -ET- denotes diminution of degree. Equivalent to the English
suffixes -let in "streamlet," -ule in "globule," "pustule." Used
as a root, eta = little, tiny, etulo = a little one.
Examples.—Pluvo = rain, pluvego = a downpour, pluveto = a
shower. Ridi = to laugh, ridegi = to guffaw, rideti = to smile.
Plori = to shed tears, ploregi = to weep bitterly, ploreti = to
whimper. Dormi = to sleep, dormegi = to sleep heavily, dormeti
= to doze, dormeto = a nap. Domo = a house, domego = a mansion,
dometo = a cottage. Ŝnuro = cord, ŝnurego = rope, cable,
ŝnureto = string, twine. Ami = to love, amegi = to idolize,
ameti = to have some liking for.
N.B.—From the above we see that -EG- and -ET- may generally be
translated by distinct words, and are not merely a substitute for
adverbs, which will often more accurately express the meaning than
the added suffix.
278. Suffixes -EJ-, -ING-, -UJ-. (Ex. 27.)
These suffixes are akin, since they denote either a place or thing
from which the idea of the root is produced, or in which it is
contained.
(a). -EJ- denotes the place of, used for, or allotted to, the
idea contained in the root. As a root, ejo = a place, a
locality.
Examples.—Ŝafo = a sheep, ŝafejo = a sheepfold, or a place
specially used for sheep. Preĝi = to pray, preĝejo = a church,
a place allotted to prayer. Fruktarbo = a fruit-tree, fruktarbejo
= an orchard, a place used for fruit trees. Kafo = coffee, kafejo
= a café. Vinbero = a grape, vinberejo = a vineyard. Armilo = a
weapon, armilejo = an armoury. Tombo = a tomb, grave, tombejo =
a cemetery. Manĝi = to eat, manĝejo = a refectory, manĝaĵo
= food, manĝaĵejo = a larder. Planti = to plant, plantejo =
nursery. Mallibera = captive, malliberejo = a prison. Bovino =
a cow, bovinejo = cowshed. Lerni = to learn, lernejo = a
school. Juĝi = to judge, juĝejo = a court of justice. Dormi =
to sleep, dormejo = a dormitory. Herbo = grass, herbejo = a
meadow, a field. Paperfari = to make paper, paperfarejo = a paper
manufactory.
(b) -ING- denotes a thing for holding one object only. Used as
a root, ingo = a socket, a sheath, a holder.
Examples.—Kandelo = a candle, kandelingo = a candlestick.
Plumo = a pen, plumingo = a penholder. Fingro = a finger,
fingringo = a thimble. Cigaredo = a cigarette, cigaredingo = a
cigarette mouthpiece. Glavo = a sword, glavingo = scabbard,
sheath (sword). Bajoneto = bayonet, bayonetingo = a scabbard
(bayonet).
(c). -UJ- denotes that which contains, produces, encloses, or
bears. Used as a root, ujo = a receptacle, a container. It has
a wide signification, for it can be used for:—
(1). The names of countries in cases where the root-word denotes
the inhabitant, as being the places which contain their various
races.
Examples.—Franco = a Frenchman, Francujo = France. Turko = a
Turk, Turkujo = Turkey. Anglo = an Englishman, Anglujo =
England. Germano = a German, Germanujo = Germany. Italo = an
Italian, Italujo = Italy. Brito = a Briton, Granda Britujo =
Great Britain. Hispano = a Spaniard, Hispanujo = Spain.
N.B.—Lando can be used instead of -ujo, if desired.
Where the root-word denotes not the inhabitant, but the country, uj
is of course not used, e.g., Aŭstralio, Nederlando, Usono. In
these cases the name of the inhabitant is formed by an from that of
the country, thus: aŭstraliano. See par. 272 (a).
(2). The names of trees producing fruits.
Examples.—Pruno = a plum, prunujo = a plum-tree. Kaŝtano = a
chestnut, kaŝtanujo = a chestnut-tree. Piro = a pear, pirujo =
a pear-tree. Migdalo = an almond, migdalujo = an almond-tree.
Moruso = a mulberry, morusujo = a mulberry-tree. Ĉerizo = a
cherry, ĉerizujo = a cherry-tree.
Arbo can be used instead of ujo in such cases, and is preferable,
because clearer, thus: prunarbo, ĉerizarbo.
(3). The names of receptacles commonly used for certain articles.
Examples.—Teo = tea, teujo = a tea-caddy or canister (a teapot
is a vessel in which tea is made, not kept, therefore tekruĉo = a
teapot, from kruĉo = a vessel for fluids). Mono = money,
monujo = a purse. Papero = paper, paperujo = a portfolio.
Sukero = sugar, sukerujo = a sugar-basin. Karto = a card,
kartujo = a card-case. Abelo = a bee, abelujo = a, beehive.
Mustardo = mustard, mustardujo = mustard-pot.
(d). The difference in meaning of these three suffixes is shown in
the following examples:—
For instance, cigaro = a cigar, cigarejo = a cigar depot; but if
we wish to distinguish the kind of depôt, viz., store, shop, etc., we
add the word required. If it be a store, we add tenejo = a
storehouse, as:—Cigartenejo = a cigar storehouse or depôt. If a
shop, we add vendejo = a market, or place where things are sold,
as:—Cigarvendejo = a cigar shop, or we might say also
cigarbutiko. Cigaringo = a cigar holder or mouthpiece, which
holds one cigar. Cigarujo = a cigar case or box, which contains
several cigars. Pomo = an apple, pomejo (or, pomarbejo) = an
apple orchard, pomujo, pomarbo = an apple-tree.
279. Suffix -ID-. (Ex. 25.)
-ID- denotes the young of, offspring, descendant. Used as a root,
ido = offspring, descendant; idaro = issue, posterity.
Examples.—Kato = a cat, katido = a kitten. Bovo = an ox, or a
general term for the animal, hence bovido = a calf; if we wished to
say a cow’s calf, we make bovo feminine, viz., bovino = a cow,
bovinido = a cow’s calf of either sex. A cow calf we should call
bovidino, and a bull calf, to determine it exactly, would be
virbovido, viz., a male calf. It is important that suffixes should
follow in their natural order (see order of suffixes, par. 46).
Ŝafo = a sheep, ŝafido = a lamb. Cervo = a stag, cervido =
a fawn. Hundo = a dog, hundido = a puppy. Ĉevalo = a horse,
ĉevalido = a foal. Koko = a cock, kokido = a chicken,
kokideto = a chick, a tiny chicken. Birdo = a bird, birdido = a
fledgeling, a young bird. Izraelo = Israel, izraelido = an
Israelite. Napoleono = Napoleon, napoleonido = a descendant of
Napoleon. Reĝo = a king, reĝido = a prince, king’s son.
280. Suffixes -IG- and -IĜ-. (Ex. 28.)
(a). These two are the most important and most widely used of all
the suffixes. They form an infinity of words, especially verbs. Used
as roots, (1). Igi = to make, to cause, as:—Igu ŝin veni al
nia dancado = Make her come to our dance. Li penis igi sian
amikon tuŝi la aferon = He tried to make his friend broach the
subject (touch upon the matter). (2). Iĝi = to become (to be
made, to get), as La vetero iĝas pli varma = The weather is
getting (becoming) warmer. Li baldaŭ iĝos maljunulo = He
will soon become an old man.
(b). Used as suffixes:—
(1). -IG- denotes (like the English suffix -fy) to make, to cause
(to get), to render, as ruĝa = red, ruĝigi = to make red,
to redden, and from this verb is formed ruĝigo = the action of
reddening, ruĝiga = reddening (adj.).
(2). -IĜ- denotes to become, to get (in the sense of to become).
Note the following difference in meaning of ruĝa with this suffix
and with -IG- in the preceding paragraph; ruĝiĝi = to become
or get red, to blush; ruĝiĝo = the action of getting red, a
blush; ruĝiĝa = blushing (adj.).
(c). The above instances are words derived from an adjective, but
the suffixes can be applied to almost any part of speech, as the
following examples will show:—
(d). From adjectives.
Examples.—Bona = good, bonigi = to make or render good,
boniĝi = to become good. Plibonigi = to make better, to improve,
pliboniĝi = to become better, to improve, plibonigo = the act of
making better, improvement (made), pliboniĝo = the state of
becoming better, improvement (experienced). Laca = tired, fatigued,
lacigi = to tire (active), laciĝi = to get tired, lacigo = the
act of tiring others, laciĝo = the state of growing tired. Preta
= ready, pretigi = to make ready, pretiĝi = to get (become)
ready. From all these verbs nouns, adjectives, and adverbs can be
formed.
(e). From nouns.
Examples.—Fianĉo = a fiancé (man), fianĉigi = to betroth, to
affiance, fianĉiĝi = to become betrothed, to be engaged,
fianĉiĝo = betrothal, engagement, fianĉiĝa = betrothing,
fianĉiĝe = by betrothal. These words speak of the betrothal of a
man, but in case of a woman we add the feminine suffix,
as:—fianĉino, fianĉinigi, fianĉiniĝi, fianĉinigo, etc.,
etc.
(f). From verbs.
Examples.—Morti = to die, mortigi = to cause to die, to kill,
mortiĝi = to die out, to expire (become dead), mortigo = killing
(murder), mortiga = deadly, mortiganto = a murderer, mortige =
mortally. Sinmortigo = suicide, sinmortigi = to commit suicide.
Sidi = to be sitting, to sit, sidigi = to cause to sit, sidiĝi
= to sit down, to seat oneself, sidigo = the act of causing to sit,
seating, sidiĝo = the act of sitting down, or of seating oneself,
as:—Li kondukis la rigardontojn al iliaj sidejoj, sed la sidigo de
tiom da gesinjoroj estis tasko malfacila, ĉar la sidiĝo de eĉ unu
sinjorino bezonas iom da tempo, kvankam ne tiom, kiom la sidiĝo de
hundo, kiu ofte turnadas sin multfoje antaŭ ol sidiĝi = He conducted
the (about to be) spectators to their seats, but the seating of so
many ladies and gentlemen was a difficult task, since the sitting
down of even one lady needs some little time, although not so much as
the sitting down of a dog, which often continues turning itself round
many times before seating itself. Sciigi = to cause (someone) to
know, or, to make (something) known. Mi sciigis la homon pri la
novaĵo, or, Mi sciigis la novaĵon al la homo = I caused the man
to know (or, I informed the man, or, I made the news known to the
man). Sciiĝi = to become informed, to learn. Mi sciiĝis pri la
novaĵo = I learnt the news.
(g). Verbs formed by -IGI are transitive (par. 161), but those by
-IĜI are intransitive, and therefore have no passive voice (par.
162); with verbs in -IĜI, therefore, we cannot use the passive
participles, -ATA, etc., but only the active forms -ANTA, etc.,
as:—Li estis fariĝinta (or, li fariĝis) maljunulo, antaŭ ol
mi lin konis = He had become an old man before I knew him.
(h). Intransitive verbs.—Some verbs, such as ĉesi = to
cease, daŭri = to continue, pasi = to pass, are neuter or
intransitive.
Examples.—La pluvo ĉesas fali (or, ĉesiĝas) = The rain ceases
to fall (or, comes to an end). La pafado daŭris kelkan tempon =
The shooting continued some time. La tempo pasas = Time passes.
In English these verbs are used both transitively and intransitively,
but if we wish to give them a transitive signification in Esperanto
we must add the suffix -IGI.
Examples.—Ĉesigu tion! vi surdigas min per via bruo! = Cease
that, you deafen me with your noise! Daŭrigu vian rakonton =
Continue your narrative. Pasigu al mi la karafon = Pass me the
decanter (see par. 237 (i)).
(i). Transitive verbs.—On the contrary,
fini = to finish, and komenci = to commence,
are transitive, and therefore do not require the addition of -IG
to make them transitive.
Examples.—Finu vian laboron = Finish your work. Ni komencis nian
vojaĝon je la dua horo = We commenced our journey at 2 o’clock.
But if we wish to give an intransitive sense to these verbs we may
use the suffix -IĜI.
Examples.—Lia laboro finiĝas = His work finishes. La jaro
finiĝos post kelkaj tagoj = The year will end in a few days. La
vojaĝo komenciĝis je la tria horo = The journey commenced at 3
o’clock (see par. 237 (i)).
(j). Numerals, prepositions, prefixes, and suffixes.—Joined to
these, -IG- and -IĜ- serve to form numerous words.
Examples.—Unuigi = to unify, unuigo = union, unuiĝi = to
unite together, to be combined, unuiĝo = union (undergone).
Duobligi = to double, duobliĝi = to become double. Aligi al =
to attribute to, aliĝi = to join (oneself) to, to adhere, aliĝo
= adhesion. Eksigi = to dismiss, eksiĝi = to become ex-, to
resign (a position). Disigi = to separate, disiĝi = to separate
mutually, disigo = act of separating, disjunction, disiĝo =
disunion, schism. Kunigi = to connect, kuniĝi = to join
together, to coalesce, kunigo = connection, kuniĝo = junction.
Forigi = to do away with, foriĝi = to withdraw.
281. Suffix -IL-. (Ex. 29.)
-IL- denotes the tool, instrument, or means by which something is
done. As a root, ilo = a tool, an instrument, an implement, a
means of.
Examples.—Kombi = to comb, kombilo = a comb. Razi = to shave,
razilo = a razor. Tranĉi = to cut, tranĉilo = a knive. Haki
= to hack, to chop, hakilo = an axe, a hatchet, a chopper. Kudri
= to sew, kudrilo = a needle. Tondi = to shear, to clip,
tondilo = shears, scissors. Presi = to print, presilo = a
printing press. Fermenti = to ferment, fermentilo = yeast, leaven
(a means of fermenting). Batali = to fight, batalilo = a weapon.
Armi = to arm, armiloj = arms, armilejo = an arsenal (a place
for arms, see -EJ-, 278).
282. Suffix -IN-. (Ex. 25.)
-IN- denotes the feminine gender. As a root, ino = a female,
ina = female.
Examples.—Frato = a brother, fratino = a sister. Patro = a
father, patrino = a mother. Kuzo = a male cousin, kuzino = a
female cousin. Avo = grandfather, avino = grandmother. Nepo = a
grandson, nepino = a granddaughter. Onklo = an uncle, onklino =
an aunt. Nevo = a nephew, nevino = a niece. Patra = paternal,
patrina = maternal, patrineco = maternity. Frata = brotherly,
fraternal, fratina = sisterly. Ĉevalo = a horse, ĉevalino = a
mare, ĉevalido = a colt, ĉevalidino = a filly. Ŝafo = a
sheep, ŝafino = a ewe. Hundo = a dog, hundino = a bitch.
Bovo = an ox, bovino = a cow.
283. MOŜTO. (Ex. 23.)
(a). This is not a suffix, since it does not form part of a word.
It is a word used by itself or added after a title to denote respect.
Via moŝto is a higher expression of respect than sinjoro =
sir.
(b). No special rule has been laid down for the use of moŝto,
but the usual practice is to make the title an adjective and add
moŝto.
(c). In speaking to persons bearing titles by birth or profession
it would be well to address them by their full title first, as shown
below, and afterwards use the expression via moŝto to represent
"Your Majesty," "Your Royal Highness," "Your Grace," "Your Lordship,"
"Your Ladyship," "Your Honour," "Your Worship," "Your Excellency,"
"Your Eminence," "Your Highness," etc. The suffix -IN is hardly
ever added.
Examples:—
- Emperor = Via imperiestra moŝto = Your Imperial Majesty.
- King = Via reĝa moŝto = Your Majesty.
- Queen = Via reĝina moŝto = Your Majesty.
- Royal Family = Via reĝida moŝto = Your Royal Highness.
- Prince = Via princa moŝto = Your Highness, or, Serene
Highness.
- Duke = Via duka moŝto = Your Grace.
- Duchess = Via dukina moŝto = Your Grace.
- Archbishop = Via ĉefepiskopa moŝto = Your Grace.
- Marquis = Via markiza moŝto = Your Lordship, My Lord.
- Earl, Count = Via grafa moŝto = Your Lordship, My Lord.
- Viscount = Via vicgrafa moŝto = Your Lordship, My Lord.
- Lord, Baron (Judge) = Via barona moŝto = Your Lordship, My Lord.
- Viceroy = Via vicreĝa moŝto = Your Excellency.
- Governor = Via rega moŝto = Your Excellency.
- Judge (not a Baron) = Via juĝista moŝto = Your Honour.
- Mayor = Via urbestra moŝto = Your Worship.
- General (Officer) = Via generala moŝto = General.
N.B.—No title beyond his rank is given to a General in England, like
"Monsieur le General" in France. We usually say "General," or "Sir,"
but moŝto might be used in Esperanto.
(d). As regards addresses of letters, we can say:—
- Al Lia Duka Moŝto de ... or, Al Lia Duka Moŝto, la Duko de ...
= To His Grace the Duke of ...
- Al Ŝia Grafina Moŝto de ... = To the Countess of ...
- Al Lia Rega Moŝto de ... = To His Excellency the Governor of ...;
or if we mention him by name:—
- Al Lia Moŝto, Sir Henry Smith La Reganto de ... = To His
Excellency, Sir Henry Smith, The Governor of ...
284. Suffixes -OBL-, -ON-, -OP-. (Ex. 18.) These three suffixes are
used with numerals, making them multiples, fractions, or collectives
(see pars. 119, 120, 121).
(a). -OBL- added to a cardinal number denotes the number is a
multiple. It is equivalent to the English suffixes "-fold" or
"-uple."
Examples.—Multoblo = a multiple, multobla = manifold. Unu =
one, unuobla = single, unuoble = singly. Du = two, duobla =
double, la duoblo = the double. Kvar = four, kvarobla =
fourfold, quadruple, la kvaroblo = the quadruple. Cent = hundred,
centoblo = a centuple. It is used in the multiplication table:—
| kvaroble tri estas (or, faras) dek du | 4 times 3 = 12 |
| kvinoble kvar estas dudek | 5 times 4 = 20 |
| sesoble kvin estas tridek | 6 times 5 = 30 |
| sepoble ses estas kvardek du | 7 times 6 = 42 |
| okoble sep estas kvindek ses | 8 times 7 = 56 |
| naŭoble ok estas sepdek du | 9 times 8 = 72 |
| dekoble naŭ estas naŭdek | 10 times 9 = 90 |
| dek-unuoble dek estas cent dek | 11 times 10 = 110 |
| dek-duoble dek unu estas cent tridek du | 12 times 11 = 132 |
(b). -ON- added to a cardinal number denotes a fraction. As a
root, ona = fractional.
Examples.—Du = two, duona = half, duone = by halves, duono =
a half (1⁄2). Tri = three, triona = third, triono = a third
(1⁄3). Kvar = four, kvarona = quarter, kvarono = a fourth
(1⁄4). Dek = ten, dekona = tenth, dekono = a tenth (1⁄10), tri
dekonoj = 3⁄10ths. Dek du = twelve, dek-duona = twelfth,
dek-duono = a twelfth (1⁄12), kvin dek-duonoj = 5⁄12ths. Sesdek
kvin centonoj = sixty-five hundredths (65⁄100). La kvinona parto
(la kvinono) de cent estas la triona parto (la triono) de sesdek, tio
estas dudek = The 5th part of 100 is the 3rd part of 60, that is 20.
(c). -OP- added to a cardinal number denotes that the number must
be taken in a collective sense. As a root, opa = collective.
Examples.—Du = two, duope = two together, in twos. Tri =
three, triope = in threes, in triplets. Dek = ten, dekope = in
tens. Dudek = twenty, dudekope = in twenties, by scores. Cent =
hundred, centope = in hundreds. Mil = thousand, milope = in
thousands. Kvinope ili sin ĵetis sur min = Five together (five at
a time) they threw themselves upon me. La soldatoj marŝis kvarope
= The soldiers were marching in fours.
285. Suffix -UM-. (Ex. 30.)
-UM- has no special meaning. Its different meanings are easily
suggested by the context and the signification of the root to which it
is joined. There are but few words in which it is used, and these should
be learnt as simple words.
The following embrace nearly all:—
- *Aerumi = to air, aerate. Aero = air.
- *Amindumi = to court, woo. Amo = love.
- Brulumo = a swelling, inflammation. Bruli = to burn.
- *Buŝumo = a muzzle (for a dog), a nose-band. Buŝumi = to
muzzle, to gag. Buŝo = mouth.
- *Butonumi = to button. Butonumilo = a buttonhook. Butono = a
button.
- Cerbumi = to rack one’s brains. Cerbo = a brain.
- *Gustumi = to taste (something). Gustumado = tasting, the sense
of tasting. Gusto = taste.
- Kalkanumo = a heel of a boot, etc. Kalkano = heel (of the foot).
- *Kolumo = a shirt collar. Kolo = neck.
- Kolombumi = to spoon, bill and coo. Kolombo = a dove.
- *Komunumo = a commune, a community. Komuna = common.
- *Krucumi = to crucify. Kruco = a cross.
- *Laktumo = milt, melt, soft roe. Lakto = milk.
- Lekumi = to lap. Leki = lick.
- *Lotumi = to allot. Loti = to draw lots.
- *Malvarmumo = a cold, chill. Malvarmumi = to catch cold.
Malvarma = cold.
- *Manumo = a cuff, a wristband. Mano = hand.
- *Mastrumi = to manage (the household), keep house. Mastrumado =
household management. Mastro = master.
- *Nazumo = a pince-nez. Nazo = nose.
- Okulumi = to make eyes at. Okulo = an eye.
- *Palpebrumi = to wink, blink. Palpebro = an eyelid.
- Partumo = a fraction (mathematics). Parto = a part, a share.
- *Plenumi = to fulfil, accomplish. Plenumiĝi = to be
accomplished, fulfilled. Plena = full, complete.
- Proksimuma, proksimume = approximately. Proksima near.
- Sapumi = to soap, lather. Sapo = soap.
- *Ventumi = to ventilate, to use a fan. Ventumilo = a fan. Vento
= wind.
N.B.—The 17 words marked * are given in Dr. Zamenhof’s "Fundamento
de Esperanto."
286. Prefixes BO-, DUON-, GE-, PRA-. (Ex. 25.)
These four prefixes all denote relationship in a greater or less
degree.
(a). BO- denotes relationship by marriage, and is equivalent to
the English suffix -in-law, as patro = father, bopatro =
father-in-law.
(b). DUON- also denotes relationship by marriage, and is also a
prefix in such words as duonpago = half-pay, duonjara =
half-yearly, etc. As a root, duono = a half, so properly it
should signify only half-blood relationship. As, however, there are
few relationships of this nature, it is used also for step
relationship, as:—Duonfrato = stepbrother or half-brother.
(c). GE- denotes both sexes taken together. The words are always
in the plural, and the feminine suffix is, of course, never added.
Examples.—Edzo = a husband, geedzoj = husband and wife, a
married couple. Sinjoro = Sir, Mr., gesinjoroj = Mr. and Mrs.,
or, ladies and gentlemen. Patro = father, gepatroj = father and
mother, parents. Mastro = a master (of a household), gemastroj =
master and mistress. Frato = brother, gefratoj = brother(s) and
sister(s).
(d). PRA- denotes great distance of time, past or future. As
regards relationship, it is the equivalent of the English prefixes
"fore-," "great," or "grand." As a root, praa = primeval.
Examples.—Pratempo = primitive time. Praarbarego = primeval
forest. Prapatroj = forefathers, ancestors. Praonklo = grand, or
great, uncle. Praavino = great-grandmother.
(e). The following are examples of these four prefixes:—
Patro = father, bopatro = father-in-law, duonpatro =
stepfather, gepatroj = father and mother, parents.
Patrino = mother, bopatrino = mother-in-law, duonpatrino =
stepmother.
Avo = grandfather, boavo = grandfather-in-law, duonavo =
stepgrandfather, geavoj = grandparents, prageavoj =
great-grandparents.
Filo = son, bofilo = son-in-law, duonfilo = stepson.
Filino = daughter, bofilino = daughter-in-law, duonfilino =
stepdaughter.
Nepo = grandson, pranepo = great-grandson, genepoj =
grandson(s) and granddaughter(s), grandchildren.
Nepino = granddaughter, pranepino = great-granddaughter.
Frato = brother, bofrato = brother-in-law, duonfrato = step, or
half, brother, gefratoj = brother(s) and sister(s), bogefratoj =
brother(s) and sister(s)-in-law.
Fratino = sister, bofratino = sister in law, duonfratino =
step, or half, sister.
Onklo = uncle, praonklo = grand, or great, uncle, geonkloj =
uncle(s) and aunt(s).
Onklino = aunt, praonklino = grand, or great, aunt.
Nevo = nephew, pranevo = grandnephew, genevoj = nephew(s) and
niece(s).
Nevino = niece, pranevino = grandniece.
Infano = child, duoninfano = stepchild.
287. Prefixes DE-, DIS-, FOR-. (Ex. 31.)
These three prefixes give the idea of separation or change of
position.
(a). DE- as a preposition = from, of. As a prefix it marks the
point of departure, or movement from one place or position to
another.
(b). DIS- denotes a separation, in the sense of a rupture, or
breaking up into parts, or in several different directions.
(c). FOR- as an adverb = away. As a prefix it denotes distance
from something.
(d). Thus, birds on a tree can fly down from the tree to the ground
= deflugi; or fly in different directions, viz., disperse =
disflugi; or fly away altogether from the tree = forflugi.
(e) The following examples will give a good idea of the meanings of
these prefixes:—
| Ŝiri = to tear, | deŝiri = to tear from, to pluck. |
| disŝiri = to tear to pieces, to lacerate. |
| forŝiri = to tear away from. |
| Iri = to go, | deiri = to go from (a place). |
| disiri = to go in different directions, to separate. |
| foriri = to go away, to depart. |
| Ĵeti =to throw, | deĵeti = to throw down, to overthrow. |
| disĵeti = to throw about, to demolish, scatter. |
| forĵeti = to throw away, to discard. |
| Meti = to put, | demeti = to put down, take off, doff. |
| dismeti = to disperse, to distribute. |
| formeti = to put away, to omit. |
| Porti = to carry, | deporti = to carry from, to deport. |
| disporti = to carry here and there. |
| forporti = to carry away. |
288. Prefix EK-. (Exs. 19, 32.)
EK- denotes an action just begun, of short duration, sudden,
momentary.
Examples.—Kanti = to sing, ekkanti = to begin to sing, or to
start singing. Ridi = to laugh, ekridi = to burst out laughing.
Krii = to cry, ekkrii = to exclaim, to cry out. Lerni = to
learn, eklerni = to begin to learn. Iri = to go, ekiri = to
start, to set out. Plori = to shed tears, ekplori = to burst out
crying. Kapti = to catch, ekkapti = to seize. Dormi = to sleep,
ekdormi = to fall asleep. Vidi = to see, ekvidi = to perceive.
Tremi = to tremble, ektremi = to start (with fear, etc.).
EK- is useful in such expressions as "begin to," "come to,"
frequently used in English before a verb, as:—Kiam mi ekpripensas
= When I begin to (or, come to) reflect. Kiam mi ekpensas pri
ĝi = When I come to think of it.
289. Prefixes MAL-, NE-, SEN-. (Ex. 33.)
(a). These three prefixes give an opposite or negative meaning to
the words before which they are placed, the nature of which varies
with the prefix used.
(b). MAL- is used as a root in the adjective mala = contrary,
and the adverb male = on the contrary, conversely. As a prefix it
signifies that the word has a meaning exactly the contrary to that
which it had before MAL- was prefixed. It is never used to give the
meaning of badness, unless because it is prefixed to some word
signifying goodness. For instance, timulo = a coward has a bad
signification, but its opposite maltimulo = a bold man has no
such meaning. Bona = good, malbona = bad, simply because
"bad" is the opposite of "good."
(c). NE is a primary adverb, meaning "no," "not," and is often
used as a prefix to give a negative signification to a word,
as:—Plena = complete, full, neplena = incomplete, not full.
Ne estas certe = it is not certain has the same signification as
estas necerte = it is uncertain. Used as a root, it forms nei =
to deny, nea = negative, etc.
(d). SEN is a preposition meaning "without," and as a prefix it
has the same signification; as ĉesi = to cease, senĉesa =
without ceasing, incessant, ceaseless; senco = meaning, sense,
sensenca = without meaning, senseless; senkapigi = to
decapitate. Used as a root, it forms senigi je = to deprive of,
seneco = want, etc.
(e). The student may at first wonder which of these three prefixes
to use in a given case. He should bear in mind that MAL- denotes
the exact opposite of the root, and therefore it may be much stronger
in signification than the mere negative ne = not, or the
privative sen = without. For instance, plena = complete,
full, but neplena = incomplete, not full. Now the opposite to
"complete" or "full" is not "incomplete" or "not full," but something
stronger, viz., "void" or "empty," therefore malplena = empty,
void, vacuous. Again, from riĉa = rich, we form the opposite,
malriĉa = poor, which is clearly a worse state than neriĉa =
not rich, or senriĉa, which, in its literal sense, means
"without wealth or riches." A man not rich might be well off, a man
without riches might have enough to live upon. Fermita = shut,
closed; the opposite is malfermita = opened, open. Applied to a
window it would mean the window was wide open, but if it were only
ajar it would be better to say nefermita = not closed.
(f) In using MAL- we must consider the strength of the word to
which we are giving an opposite meaning, and not oppose a word like
"destitute" to "rich," for "destitute" is the opposite to "rolling in
wealth," the adjective for which would be "riĉega," therefore
malriĉega = destitute. So bela = beautiful, belega =
splendid, magnificent; therefore their opposites are malbela =
ugly, malbelega = hideous.
(g). Generally speaking, it will be right (1), to use MAL- if we
wish to give a stronger idea than NE or SEN would infer; (2), to
use NE in cases where a simple negative will give the meaning; (3),
to use SEN if "without" is more applicable than "not,"
as:—Senmova = without motion, stationary, but nemovebla =
not movable, immovable. It will generally be right to employ SEN
to represent the English suffix -less, as:—Sendanka =
thankless, senmona = penniless, senhara = hairless, bald,
senutila = useless. The opposite to "useful" is something
stronger than "useless," therefore malutila = detrimental,
prejudicial.
(h). The following examples will give an idea of the use of these
three prefixes:—
Venko = victory, malvenko = defeat. Videbla = visible,
nevidebla = invisible. Ŝanĝebla = changeable (in the sense
"able to be changed"), neŝanĝebla = unchangeable. Ofta =
frequent, neofta = infrequent, malofta = scarce, rare. Simple =
simple, malsimpla = intricate, complex. Permesi = to permit,
malpermesi = to forbid. Helpi = to help, malhelpi = to hinder,
nehelpi = to give no assistance. Sobreco = sobriety, malsobreco
= intemperance, drunkenness. Saĝeco = wisdom, malsaĝeco =
foolishness. Modesta = modest, nemodesta = officious,
malmodesta = conceited. Justa = just, maljusta = unjust. Pura
= clean, nepura = soiled, malpura = dirty. Pia = pious,
malpia = impious. Agrabla = agreeable, neagrabla = unpleasant,
malagrabla = disagreeable, nasty. Glata = smooth, malglata =
rough. Atento = attention, malatento = negligence. Respekto =
respect, nerespekto = non-respect, malrespekto = violation.
Brua = noisy, senbrua = noiseless.
290. Prefix RE-. (Ex. 32.)
(a). RE-, like the English prefix re-, means "back" or "again."
It denotes (1) the repetition of an action, or (2) the return of some
person or thing to the person, place, or state with whom, or in
which, such person or thing originally was. As a root, ree =
again, in return.
(b) (1). Repetition.
Examples.—Refari = to make afresh, to remake; rediri = to say
again, to repeat (ripeti is, however, more frequently used for
"repeat"); rekanti = to sing again; rejuniĝi = to grow young
again; renaskiĝo = rebirth, regeneration; repagi = to repay, to
reimburse; reenmeti = to put in again, to reinstate; rekunigi =
to reunite; rebruligi = to rekindle; reformi = to reform, to
remodel; reprodukti = to reproduce.
(2). Return, etc.
Examples.—Redoni = to give back, to restore; repreni = to take
back; reĵeti = to throw back; resalti = to rebound; rebrili =
to shine back, to reflect; reveni = to come back, to return;
reporti = to carry back, to carry to the original place.
N.B.—In addition to the 12 prefixes given in pars. 286–290, nearly
all the prepositions are in common use as prefixes. Examples of these
will be found in par. 259. When prefixed to a verb, the preposition
is frequently repeated before the indirect complement (see par. 254).
291. Prefixes SIN- and MEM-.
SIN- and MEM- are used as prefixes to translate the English
-self. If the idea is reflexive, it is better to use sin-,
otherwise mem-. Singardo = caution; sinmortigo = suicide;
sinteno = attitude; memstara = independent; memvola =
voluntary.
292. Prefix VIC-.
The prefix VIC- denotes the English vice-; vicprezidanto = a
vice-president; vicadmiralo = a vice-admiral.
293. Suffix -ISM-.
The suffix -ISM- was officialized in 1914 with the rather wide
meaning given it by international usage in most European languages:
system, doctrine, school of thought, theory, party.
Thus: absolutismo = absolutism. Similarly, we have agnostik-,
alkohol-, braman-, despot-, epikur-, Esperant-, fatal-,
fetiĉ-, homaran-, katolik-, kvaker-, komun-, ideal-,
liberal-, mistik-, presbiter-, protestant-, puritan-,
radikal-, real-, respublik-, vegetar-ismo.
It does not follow that if from any Esperanto word ending in -ism
this syllable is subtracted, the remainder is an Esperanto root.
Thus, -ism is not a suffix in the roots atavism, feminism,
optimism, pesimism, silogism, solecism, sofism, any more
than ist, in, il, ul, an, are suffixes in the roots
optimist, turist; doktrin, vazelin; bacil, asimil;
okul, formul; banan, turban, sultan. See par. 52 (b).